WO2019047770A1 - Communication method and communication device - Google Patents

Communication method and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019047770A1
WO2019047770A1 PCT/CN2018/103376 CN2018103376W WO2019047770A1 WO 2019047770 A1 WO2019047770 A1 WO 2019047770A1 CN 2018103376 W CN2018103376 W CN 2018103376W WO 2019047770 A1 WO2019047770 A1 WO 2019047770A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
information
frequency resource
network device
message
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2018/103376
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
高宽栋
李赛楠
黄煌
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019047770A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019047770A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a communication device for communication in a wireless communication system.
  • Beamforming techniques are used to limit the energy of the transmitted signal to a certain beam direction, thereby increasing signal and reception efficiency.
  • Beamforming technology can effectively expand the transmission range of wireless signals and reduce signal interference, thereby achieving higher communication efficiency and higher network capacity.
  • it is first necessary to match the transmit beam and the receive beam so that the gain from the sender to the receiver is maximized, otherwise a relatively high communication efficiency cannot be obtained.
  • the base station end beam is required to be scanned. Beam scanning will bring many problems, one of which is the increased overhead of broadcast information transmission, especially paging information.
  • the number of terminal device identifications per paging is often increased.
  • an increase in the number of terminal device identifications will result in an overhead of power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and related products, so as to reduce power consumption of a terminal device during a paging process.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, where the method includes:
  • DCI Downlink control information DCI sent by the network device, where the DCI includes information of a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the DCI schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides at least one terminal Paging information of the device, where N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated is a partial time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks;
  • the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated is a partial time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks. Compared with demodulating the PDSCH time-frequency resource block included in the DCI, the power consumption overhead of the terminal equipment due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced.
  • the value of the N is obtained by one of the following methods:
  • the value of N is used as the value of the N according to the value of the pre-configured N.
  • the network configuration information includes at least one of the following: system information, a media access control-control element (MAC-CE), and a radio resource control (Radio resource control). , RRC) signaling, Remaining minimum system information (RMSI) or system information block (SIB).
  • RRC radio resource control
  • RMSI Remaining minimum system information
  • SIB system information block
  • the information about the PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the time-frequency resource size of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is the same; and/or each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks
  • the modulation and coding strategy MCS of the PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are the same.
  • a size of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is different; and each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is a time-frequency resource block.
  • the modulation and coding strategy MCS is the same.
  • the modulation and coding strategy MCS of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the same, and the overhead of PDCCH resources caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block further includes a size and/or a location of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the DCI further includes a number of terminal devices that are paged by each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks;
  • the DCI further includes the number of terminal device identifiers carried in each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the determining, by the DCI, a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated includes:
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks;
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the method further includes: the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, where the number of physical resource blocks (PRBs) is restricted by a pre-configuration or a manner indicated by the network device. Or the PDSCH time-frequency resource block after the bandwidth size.
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
  • the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates information after the N pieces of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are grouped;
  • the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates the size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
  • the N DCIs are received by the N PDCCHs, and each of the N DCIs includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the DCI further includes packet index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier; or
  • the DCI also includes paging access timing (Paging occasion, PO) index information, resource block size, and MCS of the terminal device identifier.
  • Paging occasion, PO paging access timing
  • the method further includes:
  • the configuration information includes Y group information, and each group of information includes information of X terminal devices of the paging or identifiers of X terminal devices; the X and Y are positive integers greater than or equal to 1;
  • the method further includes:
  • the PO that needs to be received is determined based on the values of X and Y.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, where the method includes:
  • Determining downlink control information DCI to be transmitted where the DCI includes information of a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the DCI schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides at least one terminal device Paging information, the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the DCI is transmitted through a physical downlink control channel PDCCH.
  • the method further includes:
  • the value of the N is indicated by the DCI
  • the value of the N is indicated by the network configuration information.
  • the value of the N is determined according to a pre-configuration.
  • a time-frequency resource of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks has the same time-frequency resource size; and each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks has a time-frequency
  • the modulation and coding strategy of the resource block is the same as the MCS.
  • each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is different; and/or, each PDSCH in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks
  • the modulation and coding strategy MCS of the frequency resource block is the same.
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block further includes a size and/or a location of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the DCI further includes a number of terminal devices that are paged by each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks;
  • the DCI further includes the number of terminal device identifiers carried in each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the method further includes: limiting, by a pre-configured or indicated manner, a number of physical resource blocks PRB or a bandwidth size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the N PDSCH time-frequency Information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the resource block.
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
  • the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates information after the N pieces of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are grouped;
  • the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates the size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
  • the N DCIs are received by the N PDCCHs, and each of the N DCIs includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the DCI further includes packet index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier; or the DCI further includes a PO index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier.
  • the method further includes:
  • each group of information includes an identifier of the X terminal devices or X terminal devices that are paged; the X and Y are positive integers greater than or equal to 1; : determining the paging access opportunity PO that needs to be received according to the values of X and Y.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication method, including:
  • configuration information of the paging message where the configuration information includes information of a control resource block of the paging message, where the one control resource block is searched by N paging access occasions (PO)
  • the time-frequency resource composition of the control resource of the call message is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • one control resource block is composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of paging messages corresponding to N POs, and paging messages for multiple POs can be scheduled by one control resource block, which can reduce configuration information about POs. s expenses.
  • control resource includes, but is not limited to, a physical downlink control channel PDCCH of a paging message corresponding to the PO, a downlink control information DCI of the paging message corresponding to the PO, or a control resource set CORESET of the paging message corresponding to the PO.
  • the N may also be a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the one control resource block may be composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of multiple paging messages in a PO duration.
  • the duration of the PO is a number of slots in a PO, a number of subframes, or a number of mini-slots.
  • the duration of the PO may be implicitly indicated by the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the duration of the PO is related to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the duration of the PO may be an integer multiple or a fractional multiple of the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the method further includes:
  • the duration of the PO is obtained according to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • paging messages of multiple POs may be grouped into one group.
  • the control resources of the paging messages within a group are transmitted using one control resource block.
  • the control information of the paging messages of different POs in each group may use the same DCI format, or different DCI formats may be used. For paging messages using different DCI formats, there may be the same number of bits. The number of paging messages in different groups may be equal or different.
  • the information about the configured paging message includes, but is not limited to, remaining minimum system information (RMSI), physical broadcast channel (PBCH), DCI, and radio resource control ( Radio resource control (RRC) or Medium Access Control-control element (MAC-CE).
  • RMSI remaining minimum system information
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • DCI digital subscriber control
  • RRC Radio resource control
  • MAC-CE Medium Access Control-control element
  • control resources of the paging messages corresponding to the multiple POs may be located in a common search space or in a control resource set.
  • a control resource of multiple paging messages in a PO duration may be quasi-co-located (QCL) or associated with a synchronization.
  • QCL quasi-co-located
  • SS block On the signal block (SS block), or QCL or associated to a specific reference signal.
  • the control resources of multiple paging messages (eg, PDCCHs of paging messages corresponding to multiple POs) for one PO duration may also be QCL or associated to different SS blocks, or QCL or associated to different specific reference signals.
  • the time-frequency resource block is divided into K equal parts, and the K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of the K may be the same as the number of paging messages.
  • the value of K may also be less than the number of paging messages, such that each aliquot of time-frequency resources may include control resources for multiple paging messages.
  • the value of the K may be pre-configured by a network device (for example, a base station), or may be pre-agreed by the terminal device and the network device.
  • the number of time-frequency resource shares ie, the value of the K may also be implicitly indicated according to the size of the common search space resource or the configured resource size.
  • time-frequency resource blocks of the K equal parts may be prioritized in time order, or may be placed or distributed in a frequency sequential priority manner.
  • the time-frequency resource blocks of the K equal parts may also be sequential or reversed, and may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device, or may be pre-defined by the protocol.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, including:
  • the configuration information includes time-frequency location information of a control resource block of the paging message, and the paging bit corresponding to the N paging access occasions PO of the one control resource block
  • the time-frequency resource composition of the control resource of the message; the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • one control resource block is composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of paging messages corresponding to N POs, and paging messages for multiple POs can be scheduled by one control resource block, which can reduce configuration information about POs. s expenses.
  • control resource includes, but is not limited to, a PDCCH of a paging message corresponding to the PO, a DCI of the paging message corresponding to the PO, or a CORESET of the paging message corresponding to the PO.
  • the N may also be a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the one control resource block may be composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of multiple paging messages in a PO duration.
  • the duration of the PO is a number of slots in a PO, a number of subframes, or a number of mini-slots.
  • the duration of the PO may be implicitly indicated by the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the duration of the PO is related to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the duration of the PO may be an integer multiple or a fractional multiple of the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the method further includes:
  • the duration of the PO is obtained according to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the terminal device determines, according to a period of the configuration information, a location of a time-frequency resource of a control resource of a paging message sent by the PO of the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a signal transmission method, a related device, and a system, which can dynamically configure the number of data bits of a paging indication, and reduce the resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission.
  • the paging indication may be referred to as a first message.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a terminal, first configuration information and a first message sent by a network device; the first configuration information being used by the terminal to determine the a group in which the terminal is located, the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; the terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, a group in which the terminal is located; If the group has a terminal that is paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: the network device sends the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal; the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine the terminal.
  • the first message is used to indicate whether the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; if the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged, the network device receives an uplink signal sent by the terminal. The network device sends a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
  • the first configuration information may include at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a group of the first message associated with a number, a number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, a number of data bits used to calculate packet information, a location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, a paging occasion The number, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of sync blocks.
  • the first configuration information may flexibly configure the size of the first message, that is, the number of data bits of the first message, according to actual conditions.
  • the more the number of terminals the more the number of data bits of the first message configured, or the more the number of groups associated with the first message.
  • Another possible way is that the more data terminals are configured, the more data bits are configured for the first message, or the more the number of groups associated with the first message.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device can be reduced to reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission.
  • a tracking area or a plurality of terminals within the jurisdiction of the network device or a plurality of terminals corresponding to one paging occasion may be grouped in the present application.
  • the number of groups of packets is the number of groups associated with the first message.
  • the grouping mode can be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal, or can be predefined by a standard protocol.
  • the group and terminal identifier in which the terminal is located the number of packets, the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, used for calculation
  • the number of data bits of the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks are related to at least one of . It can be understood that some or all of the above at least one piece of information may be pre-defined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the terminal may calculate the group in which the terminal is located by using the following two computing policies.
  • the first calculation strategy through the formula To calculate the group in which the terminal is located.
  • the UEID is a value represented by the terminal identifier.
  • N may be according to at least one of the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks, for example, may be the number of POs or the number of paging windows included in the DRX cycle, or may be a synchronization signal block. The number and so on.
  • n indicates that the terminal belongs to the nth group in the K group.
  • the data bits used to calculate the group information are part of the data bits in the terminal identifier.
  • the data bits used to calculate the packet information are selected by two factors: the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, and the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information.
  • the foregoing two factors may be determined by: the first factor, that is, the location of the data bit used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, which may be determined according to the constant N above; the second factor, that is, The number of data bits for calculating the packet information can be determined according to the number of groups K of the packets.
  • the first message can be used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal paged.
  • a plurality of terminals are divided into a plurality of groups, and if each of the terminals in the group includes the paged terminal, it indicates that the group has the terminal being paged.
  • the first message may indicate, by using the value of each bit, whether each group has a terminal being paged.
  • each group indicated by the first message may be each group obtained by grouping multiple terminals in a tracking area, or may be a group obtained by grouping multiple terminals in a network device jurisdiction, and It may be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals in one PO.
  • each group indicated by the first message may be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of tracking areas, or may be multiple included in a plurality of network device jurisdictions.
  • Each of the obtained groups is grouped by the terminal, and may be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals included in the plurality of paging occasions.
  • the terminal may determine the group in which the group is located according to the first configuration information, and determine, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged.
  • the network device may not need to send the first configuration information to the network device, and the items configured in the first configuration information may be agreed between the terminal and the network device, It can be pre-defined by standard protocols.
  • the terminal and the network device can determine the group in which the terminal is located according to the agreement or according to the information predefined by the standard protocol.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a terminal, first configuration information and a paging message sent by a network device; the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier of the terminal or An index; the paging message includes a truncation identifier or an index of the at least one paged terminal; the terminal determines a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal according to the first configuration information; and if the terminal has a truncated identifier and a location The truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal is the same, or the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: the network device sends the first configuration information and the paging message to the terminal; the first configuration information is used to configure the truncated identifier or index of the terminal.
  • the paging message includes a truncation identifier or index of at least one paged terminal; if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index and location of the terminal The index of the at least one paged terminal is the same, and the network device receives the uplink signal sent by the terminal.
  • the truncated identifier or index of each terminal may be flexibly configured by using the first configuration information, and the content of the paging message is less by the truncated identifier or the index paging terminal, Reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission.
  • the first configuration information may include at least one of the following:
  • a number of data bits of the first message a number of groups associated with the first message, a number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, a number of data bits used to calculate packet information, and the The location of the data bits of the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
  • the truncation identifier or index of the multiple terminals may be configured by using the first configuration information, where the multiple terminals may be multiple in one tracking area.
  • the terminal may also be a plurality of terminals within the jurisdiction of the network device, or may be a paging occasion or a plurality of terminals corresponding to the paging window.
  • the truncation identifier of the terminal is a partial data bit of the terminal identifier.
  • the truncation identifier of the terminal may be determined according to at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the truncated identifier, the location of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier, the identifier of the terminal, the number of paging occasions, the number of synchronization signal blocks, or the discontinuous reception period. length.
  • part or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol or pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the manner of determining the truncated identifier of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be multiple, may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the terminal may determine its own truncation identifier according to the first configuration information. Similar to the above-mentioned data bits for calculating group information, the truncation identifier of the terminal can be selected by the following two factors: truncating the number of data bits of the identifier, and truncating the position of the identifier in the terminal identifier.
  • the above two factors may be determined according to the following factors: the first factor, that is, the number of data bits of the truncated identifier; and the second factor, that is, the position of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier, which may be determined according to N, where N is a constant.
  • N may be determined by at least one of the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
  • the truncated identifier of the terminal may occupy M bits, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is adjacent to the lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier.
  • the lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate a paging occasion corresponding to the terminal.
  • a truncation identifier or index of at least one paged terminal may be included in the paging message.
  • the terminal may determine its own truncation identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and determine whether to be paged according to the paging message.
  • the terminal if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, the terminal considers that the terminal is paged.
  • the network device sends an uplink signal.
  • the terminal is not necessarily paged even if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the index of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal. .
  • the terminal needs to determine whether it is paged in conjunction with the acknowledgment message sent by the network device, and the acknowledgment message may carry the complete identifier of at least one paged terminal.
  • the network device may not need to send the first configuration information to the network device, and the truncation identifier of each terminal may be agreed by the terminal and the network device, or may be pre-proposed by a standard protocol. definition.
  • both the terminal and the network device can determine their own truncated identification or index according to the convention or according to pre-defined information of the standard protocol.
  • the first configuration information may be configured by at least one of the following: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, and downlink. Control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control elements.
  • the first message may be sent by using a physical downlink shared channel or a physical downlink control channel.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: the terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information; The terminal receives the first message sent by the network device, where the first message is sent by the network device according to the second message, and the first message is used to indicate the terminal. Whether the group in which the group is located is paged; if the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a network device, a second message sent by a terminal, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information; Determining, by the network device, the group in which the terminal is located according to the second message; the network device sending a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged If the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the network device receives an uplink signal sent by the terminal; and the network device sends a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device can be reduced to reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission.
  • the manner of grouping the terminal may refer to the related description of the first aspect or the second aspect, and the manner in which the network device determines the group in which the terminal is located may also refer to the related aspect of the first aspect or the second aspect. Description, not repeated here.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: a terminal sending a second message to a network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or index of the terminal; and the terminal receives the network a paging message sent by the device, where the paging message is sent after the network device determines the truncation identifier or index of the terminal according to the second message, where the paging message includes truncation of at least one paged terminal An identifier or an index; if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the terminal is The network device sends an uplink signal.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a network device, a second message sent by a terminal, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal; Determining, by the second message, a truncation identifier or index of the terminal; the network device sending a paging message to the terminal, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal;
  • the truncation identifier is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the network device receives the uplink signal sent by the terminal if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same.
  • the content of the paging message can be reduced by truncating the identifier or the index paging terminal, and the time-frequency resource overhead of the beam scanning during the paging message transmission can be reduced.
  • the truncation identifier of the terminal may refer to the related description of the third aspect or the fourth aspect, and details are not described herein.
  • the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by the first aspect or any one of the possible embodiments of the first aspect.
  • the terminal may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive first configuration information and a first message sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate Whether the group in which the terminal is located is paged;
  • the determining unit is configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a group in which the terminal is located; and the sending unit is configured to: if the group in which the terminal is located The terminal is paged to send an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the present application provides a network device, which may include multiple functional modules for performing the method provided by the second aspect or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect.
  • the network device may include: a receiving unit, and a sending unit.
  • the sending unit is configured to send the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate the Whether the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged;
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal if the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged;
  • the sending unit is further configured to perform The uplink signal sends a paging message to the terminal.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a number of groups associated with the first message And indicating, in the first message, a number of data bits of each group, a number of data bits used to calculate the group information, a location of the data bits used to calculate the group information in the terminal identifier, and a number of paging occasions.
  • the group n in which the terminal is located is:
  • the UEID is an identifier of the terminal
  • K is a number of groups associated with the first message
  • N is a constant
  • N passes the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the synchronization signal. At least one of the number of blocks is determined.
  • the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the third aspect or any one of the possible embodiments of the third aspect.
  • the terminal may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive first configuration information and a paging message sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes at least one a truncating identifier or index of the paging terminal; the determining unit, configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal; the sending unit, if the truncation identifier and the location of the terminal The truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal is the same, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, an uplink signal is sent to the network device.
  • the present application provides a network device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • the network device may include: a sending unit, a receiving unit.
  • the sending unit is configured to send first configuration information and a paging message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes at least one paged message.
  • the receiving unit is configured to: if the truncated identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the at least one is found The index of the calling terminal is the same, and receives the uplink signal sent by the terminal.
  • the first configuration information when the first configuration information is used to configure the truncation identifier of the terminal, includes at least one of the following: The number of data bits of the truncated identifier of the terminal, the location of the truncated identifier of the terminal in the terminal identifier, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks; wherein the terminal The truncation identifier is a partial data bit identified by the terminal.
  • the location of the truncation identifier of the terminal is adjacent to the lowest log 2 N data bits of the terminal identifier; N is a constant, and N passes At least one of the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks is determined.
  • the first configuration information is configured by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information , other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information or media access control layer control elements.
  • the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • the terminal may include: a receiving unit, and a sending unit.
  • the sending unit is configured to send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive, send, by the network device
  • the first message the first message is sent by the network device after determining the group in which the terminal is located according to the second message, where the first message is used to indicate whether the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal
  • the sending unit is further configured to send an uplink signal to the network device if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
  • the present application provides a network device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the sixth aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the network device may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive a second message that is sent by the terminal, where the second message includes data bits that are used by the terminal to calculate packet information, and the determining unit is configured to use, according to the second message, Determining a group in which the terminal is located; the sending unit, configured to send a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; the receiving unit, The method is further configured to: if the terminal in which the terminal is located, the terminal is paged, and receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal; the sending unit is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
  • the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the seventh aspect or the seventh aspect.
  • the terminal may include: a receiving unit, and a sending unit.
  • the sending unit is configured to send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive a paging message sent by the network device, where The paging message is sent after the network device determines the truncation identifier or index of the terminal according to the second message, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal;
  • the unit is further configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, The network device sends an uplink signal.
  • the present application provides a network device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect.
  • the network device may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive a second message sent by the terminal, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal, and the determining unit is configured to determine, according to the second message, the terminal
  • the sending unit is configured to send a paging message to the terminal, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal; the receiving unit is further configured to:
  • the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the uplink signal sent by the terminal is received.
  • the second message is sent when the terminal initiates an attach request.
  • the second message may be sent by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
  • the present application provides a terminal for performing the signal transmission method described in the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect.
  • the terminal can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as network devices.
  • the memory is used to store implementation code of the signal transmission method described in the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect
  • the processor is configured to execute program code stored in the memory, that is, perform the first aspect Or the method provided by the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect, or the method provided by any one of the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect possible embodiment.
  • the present application provides a network device for performing the signal transmission method described in the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect.
  • the terminal can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as terminals.
  • the memory is used to store implementation code of the signal transmission method described in the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect
  • the processor is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory, that is, perform the second aspect Or the method provided by the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect, or the method provided by any one of the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect possible embodiment.
  • a communication system comprising: a terminal and a network device. among them:
  • the terminal may be the terminal described in the above ninth or eleventh aspect or the thirteenth aspect or the fifteenth aspect, and the network device may be the above tenth or twelfth aspect or the fourteenth aspect or the The network device described in the sixteenth aspect.
  • the terminal may also be the terminal described in the above seventeenth aspect, and the network device may also be the network device described in the above eighteenth aspect.
  • the present application is also an embodiment of a communication device including a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored on the memory and operable on the processor, the processor executing the program to cause the communication device to implement the above The steps performed by the method.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable medium for storing a computer program, when the computer program is executed, causing a method in any of the above possible implementations to be executed.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method in any of the above possible implementation manners.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a possible number of data bits for calculating packet information and a location in a terminal identifier provided by the present application;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the number of data bits of a possible truncation identifier and the location in the terminal identifier provided by the present application;
  • FIGS. 7A-7G are schematic flowcharts of a signal transmission method provided by the present application.
  • 8A-8D are functional block diagrams of a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the terminal device in the present application is a device having an infinite communication function, and may be a handheld device having a wireless communication function, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, a computing device, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • Terminal devices in different networks may be called different names, such as: user equipment, access terminals, subscriber units, subscriber stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile devices, user terminals, terminals, wireless communications.
  • Device, user agent or user device cellular phone, cordless phone, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), Terminal equipment in a 5G network or a future evolution network.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • WLL Wireless Local Loop
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the base station in this application may also be referred to as a base station device, and is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide wireless communication functions, and may be Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) or code division multiple access.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • NodeB, NB for short in Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • It may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in Long Term Evolution (LTE), or a relay station or an access point, a transmission node or a transmission and reception point in a new air interface (NR) system.
  • NR new air interface
  • TRP Transmission point
  • TP next generation Node B
  • Wi-Fi Wireless-Fidelity
  • wireless backhaul node small station, micro station, or the fifth generation Base stations and the like in the 5th Generation Mobile Communication (5G) network are not limited herein.
  • a beam can be understood as a spatial resource and can refer to a transmit or receive precoding vector with energy transmission directivity.
  • the transmitting or receiving precoding vector can be identified by index information.
  • the energy transmission directivity may be that the signal received by the precoding process after receiving the precoding vector has a good receiving power in a certain spatial position, such as satisfying the receiving demodulation signal to noise ratio, etc.; Directivity may also mean that the same signals transmitted from different spatial locations are received by the precoding vector with different received power.
  • the same communication device may have different precoding vectors, and different devices may also have different precoding vectors, that is, corresponding to different beams.
  • one communication device can use one or more of a plurality of different precoding vectors at the same time, ie, one or more beams can be formed at the same time.
  • the information of the beam can be identified by the index information.
  • the index information may be corresponding to a resource identifier of a user equipment (UE), for example, the index information may correspond to a configured channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • the ID or resource may also correspond to the ID or resource of the configured Sounding Reference Signal (SRS).
  • the index information may also be index information of a signal or channel display or implicit bearer carried by the beam, for example, the index information may be a synchronization signal sent by a beam or a broadcast channel indicating the beam. Index information.
  • the beam pair may include a transmit beam at the transmitting end and a receive beam at the receiving end, or also referred to as an uplink beam or a downlink beam.
  • the beam pair may include a gNB Tx beam transmission beam or a UE Rx beam reception beam, or a UE Tx beam transmission beam or a gNB Rx beam reception beam, where the transmission beam may also be understood as a transmission beam.
  • the beam can be a wide beam, or a narrow beam, or other type of beam.
  • the beamforming technique can be beamforming techniques or other technical means.
  • the beamforming technology can be specifically digital beamforming technology, analog beamforming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be transmitted through different beams. Alternatively, multiple beams having the same or similar communication characteristics can be considered as one beam.
  • One beam may include one or more antenna ports for transmitting a data channel, a control channel, a sounding signal, etc., for example, the transmitting beam may be a signal intensity distribution formed in different directions of the space after the signal is transmitted through the antenna.
  • the receive beam may refer to a signal strength distribution of wireless signals received from the antenna in different directions in space.
  • One or more antenna ports forming one beam can also be considered as one antenna port set.
  • the beam can also be a spatial filter.
  • the transmission of the channel is in units of radio frames, and one radio frame includes 10 subframes, each subframe has a length of 1 millisecond (ms), and each subframe includes two subframes. Slot, each slot is 0.5ms. The number of symbols included in each slot is related to the length of the CP (cyclic prefix) in the subframe. If the CP is a normal (normal) CP, each slot includes 7 symbols, and each subframe is composed of 14 symbols. For example, each subframe has a sequence number of #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, respectively. , #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13 symbol composition.
  • each slot includes 6 symbols, and each subframe is composed of 12 symbols.
  • each subframe has a sequence number of #0, #1, #2, #3, #4,# 5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11 symbol composition.
  • the downlink symbols are called orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • a resource element is the smallest unit in the time-frequency domain, and is uniquely identified by an index pair (k, l), where k is a subcarrier index and l is a symbol index.
  • a communication resource may also be simply referred to as a resource.
  • Communication resources can be used to transmit signals.
  • the types of communication resources may be spatial resources, time domain resources, and frequency domain resources.
  • the types of communication resources may be beams, ports, and the like.
  • a collection of different kinds of communication resources is also a communication resource.
  • a time-frequency resource block (including a time domain resource and a frequency domain resource) is a communication resource, and a combination of a beam and a port is also a communication resource.
  • first and second in this application are used for descriptive purposes only, and are not to be construed as indicating or implying a relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Thus, features defining “first” and “second” may include one or more of the features either explicitly or implicitly.
  • the base station pages 4 times in each frame, each time 16 users, each frame is 10ms, so the base station can call up to 6400 users per second.
  • the maximum number of SS blocks in NR is 64, and the maximum number of POs in each frame is 4.
  • the data of one beam occupies at least 2 OFDM symbols, the first symbol is PDCCH, and the second is PDSCH. .
  • the scanning resources occupied by the four POs are 512 OFDM symbols. For a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz, one frame has a total of 1120 symbols, and 45% (512/1120) of paging resources are occupied. It is a huge overhead for limited paging resources.
  • the occupation of paging resources by the total resources can be reduced.
  • the increase in the number of terminal device identifications will increase the bandwidth within the PO, and the terminal device searching for the terminal device identifier within a relatively large bandwidth increases the overhead of power consumption.
  • FIG. 1 shows a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system can operate in a high frequency band, not limited to an LTE system, and can also be a 5G system, an NR system, a machine to machine (M2M) system, or the like.
  • wireless communication system 100 can include one or more network devices 101, one or more terminals 103. among them:
  • the network device 101 may be an access network device, such as a base station, and the base station may be used to communicate with one or more terminals, or may be used to communicate with one or more base stations having partial terminal functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station). , such as access points, communication between).
  • Network device 101 can also be a core network device that can be used to communicate with a base station or terminal 103.
  • the core network device may be a mobility management entity (MME), and a mobility management device in the future 5G.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile.
  • the wireless communication system 100 is a multi-beam communication system. among them:
  • the network device 101 can be configured with a large-scale antenna array and utilize beamforming techniques to control the antenna array to form beams of different orientations.
  • the terminal when a terminal is in a certain determined position, corresponding to the transmission range of one or more pointing beams, the terminal can receive the signal transmitted by using the one or more pointing beams at the determined position. .
  • the network device 101 since the network device 101 does not know which location the paged terminal is in, the network device 101 needs to use a plurality of different pointing beams to send a paging message to cover the entire cell 107, ensuring that it is sought.
  • the calling terminal receives the paging message, and the process may be referred to as Beam scanning.
  • the network device 101 may configure the number of users of one PO page or the number of terminal identification (UE identification).
  • the terminal device identifier may be all of the UE ID, or may be part of the UE ID, or may be an index-based UE ID.
  • the network device 101 may configure the number of users or the number of UE IDs of one PO page in at least one of system information, RRC signaling, MAC-CE signaling, RMSI, or system information block SIB through network configuration information.
  • the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO may be related to the number of SS blocks, related to the paging mechanism, and related to the SCS.
  • the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO is related to the paging mechanism, for example, if the paging mechanism is the beam scanning mode, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32 or 64; if the paging mechanism is a wide beam or an omnidirectional beam mode, the maximum number of UE IDs It may be 16; if the paging mechanism is in LTE mode, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 16.
  • the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO is related to the frequency band, if the frequency band is higher than 6 GHz, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 64 or 32; if the frequency band is 3 GHz to 6 GHz, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32 or 64; if the frequency band is lower than 3 GHz
  • the maximum number of UE IDs can be 16 or 32.
  • the transmission bandwidth of the paging message is higher than 100 M, and the maximum number of UE IDs may be 64 or 32; if the transmission is performed under subcarriers of 120 kHz, The bandwidth is less than 100M, and the maximum number of UE IDs can be 16 or 32.
  • the maximum number of UE IDs may be 64; if the number of base stations in the TA area is greater than 8 and less than 32, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32. If the number of base stations in the TA area is less than 8, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 16.
  • the network device 101 can configure the number of terminal devices or the number of UE IDs for one PO paging.
  • the terminal device 103 can determine the PO of the terminal device based on at least one of the values of X and Y, and the UE ID.
  • the method for the network device 101 to determine the PO may be determined by querying a pre-configured form.
  • the network device 101 can also configure the total number of terminal devices that can be paged at most.
  • multiple PDSCHs may be scheduled by using one PDCCH, or one PDSCH may be scheduled by one PDCCH.
  • the number of identifications of the terminal devices 103 increases, which in turn increases the bandwidth within the PO.
  • the terminal device 103 searches for the terminal device identity within a relatively large bandwidth to increase the overhead of power consumption.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method and device, so as to reduce the problem that the terminal device has a large power consumption when searching for the terminal device identifier.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes:
  • Step 100 When the network device indicates the information of the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) time-frequency resource block to the terminal device, the network device sends the DCI to the terminal device, where the DCI includes the PDSCH time-frequency resource.
  • Information of the block the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes one or more second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides paging information of at least one terminal device, that is, each second PDSCH
  • the time-frequency resource block maps an identifier of at least one terminal device;
  • the network device may send the DCI to the terminal device by using a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH).
  • PDCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • the PDCCH is sent by the network device to the terminal device, and is used to send downlink scheduling information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device receives the PDSCH.
  • the DCI specifies the resources occupied by the PDSCH, the modulation and coding scheme (MCS), the information related to the initial transmission or retransmission, the layer, and the precoding.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the network device can configure the content of the DCI before sending it to the terminal device.
  • the information of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the network device may also allocate the identifier of the terminal device scheduled by the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block to 10, and determine the packet according to the result of the redundancy.
  • the result of the remainder is a group of 0-3, the result of the remainder is a group of 4-7, and the result of the remainder is a group of 8-9. It should be noted that the remainder of the present invention is only an example. In the specific implementation, other values may be used.
  • the size of each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same.
  • the size of each of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks may also be different. The specific implementation manner is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the MSC of each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same. In this way, the overhead of PDCCH resources caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
  • the number of the one or more second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks may be sent by the network device to the terminal device by sending DCI or network configuration information, where the terminal device indicates according to the received DCI or network configuration information.
  • the number of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks determines the number of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  • the network configuration information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of system information, RRC signaling, MAC-CE signaling, RMSI, SIB1, or system information blocks.
  • the number of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks scheduled by the DCI sent by the network device may also be determined in a pre-configured manner.
  • the number of terminal device identifiers in each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may also be included in the DCI.
  • the allocation of the resource block field can be used instead. Since the number of bits occupied by the resource block field is large and the number of bits of the terminal device identifier is small, the bit overhead of the DCI field can be saved.
  • the network device includes but is not limited to: a base station, a transmission reception point (TRP), or a relay.
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • relay a relay
  • Step 102 The terminal device receives the DCI sent by the network device, and determines a second PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the DCI.
  • the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block is a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated.
  • the determining, by the terminal device, the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to its own identifier includes but is not limited to:
  • the number or location of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to its own identity is obtained by allocating all or part of the data bits to the terminal device.
  • the value of N is the value of N when the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block is divided into time-frequency resource blocks of the N second PDSCHs.
  • Step 104 The terminal device demodulates the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined in step 102.
  • the terminal device first determines a second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity, and demodulates the determined second PDSCH time-frequency resource block. Compared with demodulating the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block that is larger than the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the power consumption overhead of the terminal device due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device, according to the demodulated second PDSCH time-frequency resource block, searching whether the second identifier of the second PDSCH is the demodulated time resource. In the block. In this way, the terminal device can know whether or not it is paged.
  • the network device may also indicate information about a PDSCH time-frequency resource block size scheduled by the terminal device.
  • a network device scheduling two PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks as an example. It can be understood that the implementation manner of the network device scheduling N (N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1) PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is similar to the implementation manner described below, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the method includes:
  • Step 200 When the network device indicates the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block to the terminal device, the network device sends the DCI by using the PDCCH, where the DCI includes the information of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the first PDSCH time-frequency resource.
  • the DCI further includes an MCS of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the network device can configure the content of the DCI before sending it to the terminal device.
  • the information of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the information of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the DCI that is sent by the network device through the PDCCH may also include only the information of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the information of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same.
  • the sizes of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may also be different.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit a specific implementation manner.
  • the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block have the same modulation and coding strategy.
  • the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the same as the MCS of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block, and the overhead of the PDCCH resource caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
  • the DCI may further include a number of terminal device identifiers in each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block, which may be used to replace the allocation of resource block fields, and save the overhead of the DCI field.
  • the network device includes but is not limited to: a base station, a TRP, or a relay.
  • Step 202 The terminal device receives the DCI sent by the network device, and determines a PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the identity of the PDSCH.
  • the size of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be acquired.
  • the terminal device may further acquire the size of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the size of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block. For example, the terminal device obtains the size of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block by subtracting the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block from the size of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the DCS received by the terminal device may further include the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the MCS of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the terminal device may search for the location of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block where the identity is located according to the identifier of the terminal.
  • the terminal device determines that the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the terminal device includes but is not limited to:
  • the number or location of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to its own identity is obtained by allocating all or part of the data bits to the terminal device.
  • the N may be any positive integer.
  • the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identifier of the terminal device may be the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block or the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be independent coding processes.
  • the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same or different.
  • Step 204 The terminal device demodulates the PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined in step 202.
  • the terminal device first determines a PDSCH time-frequency resource block (a second PDSCH time-frequency resource block or a third PDSCH time-frequency resource block) corresponding to the identifier, and determines the PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined by demodulation. Whether its own identity is in the determined PDSCH time-frequency resource block. Compared with the demodulation being greater than the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the power consumption overhead of the terminal device due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device, according to the demodulated PDSCH time-frequency resource block, searching whether the identifier of the PDSCH is in the information carried by the demodulated PDSCH time-frequency resource block. In this way, the terminal device can know whether or not it is paged.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the method includes:
  • Step 300 When the network device indicates the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block to the terminal device, the network device schedules, by using one PDCCH, N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, where the DCI sent by the network device includes each PDSCH time-frequency resource. The information of the block; or the network device schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks by using N PDCCHs, where the network device sends N DCIs, and each DCI includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block;
  • the N may be any positive integer.
  • the value of the N may be sent by the network device to the terminal device by sending the DCI and the network configuration information, and the terminal device determines the PDSCH time-frequency resource according to the value of the N in the received DCI or the network configuration information.
  • the network configuration information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of system information, RRC signaling, MAC-CE signaling, RMSI, SIB1, or system information blocks.
  • the number of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks scheduled by the DCI transmitted by the network device may also be determined in a pre-configured manner.
  • the size of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the MCS may be included in the foregoing DCI.
  • the size of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same.
  • the size of each of the PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks may be different. The specific implementation manner is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the MSC of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same. In this way, the overhead of PDCCH resources caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
  • the foregoing DCI may further include packet index information, a PO index, or a PDSCH index of the terminal device identifier.
  • the number of terminal device identifiers in each PDSCH time-frequency resource block may also be included in the DCI.
  • the allocation of the resource block field can be used instead. Since the number of bits occupied by the resource block field is large and the number of bits of the terminal device identifier is small, the bit overhead of the DCI field can be saved.
  • the network device includes but is not limited to: a base station, a TRP, or a relay.
  • Step 302 The terminal device receives the DCI sent by the network device, and determines a PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the identity of the terminal.
  • the terminal device determines that its own identity determines that the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the terminal includes, but is not limited to:
  • the packet information, the resource location information, and the MCS where the identity of the terminal device is located are searched according to the identity of the terminal device to determine a PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the terminal device.
  • the PO index, the resource location information, and the MCS where the own identifier is located are searched according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identifier is determined.
  • the terminal device spares its own identity to the number of packets or spares the part identified by itself to the number of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and compares the obtained value with the PO index or the packet index in the DCI to obtain and The position of the same PDSCH index of the obtained value or the PDSCH resource block of the PO index is taken to determine a PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  • Step 304 The terminal device demodulates the PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined in step 302.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity identifier in the DCI, and determines whether the identity of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is in the determined PDSCH time-frequency resource block by demodulating the determined PDSCH time-frequency resource block. Since the demodulation is performed only for the time-frequency resource block corresponding to the self-identification, the power consumption overhead of the terminal device due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced relative to the demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the self-identification.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device searching, according to the demodulated PDSCH time-frequency resource block, whether the identifier of the PDSCH is carried in the information carried by the PDSCH.
  • the N different PDCCHs may be scrambled by using M different P-RNTIs.
  • different packet information may be indicated by different P-RNTIs.
  • the information of different POs may be indicated by different P-RNTIs.
  • the multiple PDs or the PDSCHs of the multiple packets may be combined, and one PDCCH is used for scheduling, and multiple POs or multiples are used.
  • UE packets are indicated using the same P-RNTI.
  • N may be configured in the system information, for example, by radio resource control (RRC) signaling or MAC-CE signaling, or may be configured in the remaining RMSI or SIB1. It may also be configured in the PDCCH or the protocol is specified according to certain rules.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the network device needs to configure the control resource location of the paging message corresponding to each PO.
  • there may be multiple POs in a SS burst set period or a PBCH period in a synchronization signal segment set and there may be multiple POs in one RMSI period or one SIB information period.
  • the time-frequency resource of the control resource that sends the paging message is configured by the base station.
  • the period of the configuration information of the paging message may not coincide with the transmission period of the paging information. Therefore, it is necessary to configure time-frequency resources of control resources of a plurality of paging messages in the configuration information of the paging message.
  • the control resources of the paging message include, but are not limited to, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) of the PO, downlink control information (DCI) of the PO, or a control resource set (CORESET) of the PO.
  • the configuration information of the paging message refers to information of a control resource for configuring a paging message, including but not limited to: RMSI, PBCH, DCI, RRC or media MAC-CE.
  • multiple paging messages may be grouped into one group.
  • Control resources for paging messages within a group are scheduled or configured together. For example, it can be implemented by configuring a large time-frequency resource block by the configuration information of the paging message.
  • the network device may send configuration information of the paging message to the terminal device, where the configuration information includes information about a control resource block of the paging message, and the time when the one control resource block is controlled by the paging message corresponding to the N POs Frequency resource composition; the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the network device sends a control resource of the paging message to the terminal device based on the configuration information.
  • the N may also be a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the terminal device receives the configuration information sent by the network device, and receives a control resource of a paging message sent by the network device.
  • the configured time-frequency resource block may be further divided into K equal parts.
  • K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the value of K can be the same as the number of paging messages.
  • the value of K may also be less than the number of paging messages, such that each aliquot of time-frequency resources may include control resources for one or more paging messages.
  • the number of paging messages in each paging message group may be configured by a network device (for example, a base station), or may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device.
  • a network device for example, a base station
  • the K-equal time-frequency resources may be prioritized in time order, or may be placed or distributed in a frequency-sequence-first manner.
  • the order of the time-frequency resources of the K equal parts is not limited, and the time-frequency resources of the K equal parts may be sequential or reversed, which may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device. It can also be pre-configured by the protocol.
  • the number of time-frequency resource shares may be configured by a network device (for example, a base station), or may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device.
  • the number of time-frequency resource shares ie, the value of the K may also be implicitly indicated according to the size of the common search space resource or the configured resource size.
  • different paging messages in each group may use the same DCI format, or different DCI formats may be used.
  • DCI formats there may be the same number of bits.
  • the number of paging messages in different groups may be equal or different.
  • control resources of the paging messages corresponding to the multiple POs may be located in a common search space or in a control resource set.
  • a control resource of a paging message corresponding to multiple POs may be quasi-co-located (QCL) or associated with an SS block, or The QCL is on a specific reference signal.
  • the control resources of the paging messages corresponding to the plurality of POs may also be QCL to different SS blocks or QCLs to different specific reference signals.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device enters a DRX cycle, for example, after the terminal device wakes up from the DRX cycle, it may first receive configuration information of the paging message sent by the base station, and determine the PO group where the terminal device is located by using the terminal device identifier (UE ID), and then The location of the control resource of the PO corresponding to the terminal device in the PO group is determined by using the UE ID and the number N of the PO group, and the location of the paging information about the terminal device is determined by demodulating the control resource.
  • UE ID terminal device identifier
  • each 8 POs are configured as two groups, each The group uses four POs as an example to describe the manner in which the terminal device determines the control information and/or the paging message.
  • UE ID device identifier
  • the calculation of the PO location of the terminal device is related to the period of the configuration information, that is, the terminal device can calculate the location of the PO based on the period of the configuration information.
  • the configuration information period may be an SS burst set period, an RMSI period, an RRC period, a MAC-CE period, or a SIB period.
  • the duration of the PO is related to the number of SS blocks in an SS burst set or the actual number in the SS block, and the number of SS blocks refers to the number of SS blocks in which the repeated SS blocks are removed.
  • the duration of the PO may also be related to the number of RMSIs in one RMSI period or to the number of system information blocks (e.g., SIB1) within a certain system information block period.
  • the duration of the PO refers to the number of slots in a PO, or the number of subframes, or the number of mini-slots. The duration may be implicitly indicated by the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
  • the duration of the PO may also be an integer multiple or a fractional multiple of the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs. For example, there are 16 SS blocks in the SS burst set.
  • the duration of the PO can be 16 subframes or 16 slot slots, that is, the number of subframes of the duration of the PO or the number of slots of the duration or the minislot (mini- The number of slots is a multiple of the number of SS blocks in the SS burst set, or a multiple of the number of RMSIs in the RMSI period, and may be a multiple of other specific values, for example, the specific value is configured by the network device, and the embodiment of the present application The implementation of the specific multiple is not limited.
  • a multiple of the number of SS blocks in the SS burst set may be configured by RMSI, PBCH, RRC, MAC-CE, or SIB.
  • RMSI Radio Resource Management
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • MAC-CE Network Control Component Interconnect Express
  • SIB Interference Block
  • the duration of the PO is 32 subframes or 32 slots.
  • some subframes, slots, or mini-slots may be skipped, for example, skipping uplink and downlink switching subframes, and the like.
  • the configuration information configures a single QCL or associated paging information on different SS blocks or on different specific reference signals, and controls a single continuation of resource information or paging information (which can remove skipped subframes, slots, or mini-slots)
  • the time period multiplied by the number of SS blocks or the number of RMSIs, gives the duration of the total PO.
  • different SS blocks in the SS burst set may be grouped, so different paging messages in one PO may also be grouped, and paging messages in different groups may have different configurations.
  • the QCL is associated with paging information on different SS blocks or on different specific reference signals, and the control resource information or paging information may be in an equally spaced time period (the skipped subframe, slot, or mini- may be removed).
  • the slot is selected for the duration of the transmission.
  • the duration of the PO is equally divided into time segments of the number of paging messages, and one paging message is sent during each paging time period. For example, if the number of SS blocks is doubled, the QCL or the paging message associated with the first SS block may be sent in the first two slots or the first two subframes; the QCL is associated with the second SS block.
  • the paging message can be sent on the 3rd or 4th subframe or slot.
  • the time offset of the initial subframe or the initial slot or mini-slot may be configured by using RMSI, PBCH, RRC, MAC-CE, or SIB, etc., with respect to each equal interval period. It is also possible to pass a blind check, for example, in the case of twice the number of SS blocks, the QCL or the paging message associated with the first SS block can be sent on the first Slot with a time offset of 0; QCL or association The paging message to the second SS block can be sent on the fourth slot with a time offset of 1, which is the time offset relative to the third slot.
  • the time offset of the third slot may be the time offset of the first slot in the second equally spaced time period.
  • the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a multi-beam communication system.
  • the network device 101 can be configured with a large-scale antenna array and utilize beamforming techniques to control the antenna array to form beams of different orientations. It can be understood that when a terminal is in a certain determined position, corresponding to the transmission range of one or more pointing beams, the terminal can receive the signal transmitted by using the one or more pointing beams at the determined position. .
  • the network device 101 since the network device 101 does not know which location the paged terminal is in, the network device 101 needs to use a plurality of different pointing beams to send a paging message to cover the entire cell 107, ensuring that it is sought.
  • the calling terminal receives the paging message, and the process may be referred to as Beam scanning.
  • the beam scanning covering the entire cell causes a large overhead of resources.
  • the signal transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described below to solve the problem of large resource overhead caused by full beam scanning.
  • the network device sends a paging indication to a plurality of terminals
  • the multiple terminals may be multiple terminals in a tracking area identity (TA) range, or may be a network device jurisdiction.
  • the plurality of terminals in the terminal may also be a plurality of terminals in a paging occasion (PO).
  • the plurality of terminals that receive the paging indication send the uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn the beam where the multiple terminals are located by using the uplink signal, and the network device utilizes the plurality of terminals because the paging terminal is included in the multiple terminals.
  • the beam in which the terminal is located performs beam scanning to send a paging message, so that the paged terminal receives the paging message.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device is greatly reduced compared with the total beam corresponding to the network device, which saves the overhead of beam scanning.
  • the paging indication may be configured by a network device, which is described in detail below.
  • a plurality of terminals may be grouped, and the multiple terminals may be multiple terminals within a tracking area identity (TA) range, or may be multiple terminals within the jurisdiction of a network device, and may also be It is a multiple terminal within a paging occasion.
  • the network device may notify the group in which the plurality of terminals are paged by the paging indicator. If the group in which the terminal is located includes the paged terminal, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn by the uplink signal. Paging the beam of all the terminals in the group where the terminal is located, and using the beam to perform beam scanning to send a paging message, to ensure that the paged terminal receives the paging message.
  • TA tracking area identity
  • the size of the paging indicator ie, the number of data bits occupied by the paging indication
  • the number of groups associated with the paging indication ie, the number of groups of multiple terminals in the present application
  • the paging indication can be flexibly configured by the network device through configuration information.
  • the paging indication may be referred to as a first message, and the configuration information may be referred to as first configuration information.
  • DRX discontinuous reception
  • SS block synchronization signal block
  • the DRX period may be the default DRX period, that is, the DRX period of all or some of the terminals in a cell is the same, and may be configured by the network device; the DRX period may also be a specific DRX period reported by each terminal according to its own situation.
  • multiple POs may be included, and in the present application, POs may also be considered as paging windows.
  • PO refers to a subframe that may include a paging message.
  • the terminal only needs to listen to the PO corresponding to the terminal in a DRX cycle. Understandably, multiple terminals can listen to the same PO during the paging process.
  • a plurality of terminals that listen to the same PO are referred to as terminals corresponding to the PO.
  • the number of sync blocks affects the number of POs in a DRX cycle, and there is a functional relationship between the number of sync blocks and the number of POs. For example, when the number of sync signal blocks in a set period of a sync signal segment is large, the number of POs is reduced.
  • the length of the DRX cycle may also affect the number of POs in the DRX cycle. For example, the longer the length of the DRX cycle, the greater the number of POs in the DRX cycle.
  • multiple terminals can be grouped.
  • the plurality of terminals may be multiple terminals within a tracking area, or may be multiple terminals within the jurisdiction of one network device, or may be multiple terminals within one PO.
  • each terminal can calculate the group in which it is located.
  • the group in which the terminal is located may be determined according to at least one of the following: the number of groups K of the packet, the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and the terminal.
  • some or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol.
  • the terminal may determine the group according to the foregoing at least one item, which may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the number K of the group after the multiple terminals are grouped may be any one or more of the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, and the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message. For the determination, refer to the related descriptions in the following key technical points (4) and (5), and will not be described here.
  • the following example illustrates how the terminal determines the group in which it is based on at least one of the above information.
  • the group in which the terminal is located can be calculated by the following two computing strategies.
  • the first calculation strategy through the formula To calculate the group in which the terminal is located.
  • the UEID is a terminal identifier.
  • the terminal identifier can uniquely identify a terminal.
  • the terminal identifier may be an international mobile subscriber identification number (IMSI), a SAE temporary mobile station identifier (S-TMSI), or the like, which may determine the identity of the unique terminal.
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identification number
  • S-TMSI SAE temporary mobile station identifier
  • N may be a constant, and may be determined according to at least one of the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
  • N may be the number of POs or the number of paging windows included in the DRX cycle, and may also be the number of synchronization signal blocks, and the like.
  • n indicates that the terminal belongs to the nth group in the K group.
  • the data bits used to calculate the group information are part of the data bits in the terminal identifier.
  • the data bits used to calculate the packet information are selected by two factors: the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, and the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information.
  • a part of the data bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate the PO corresponding to the terminal. After the data bits of the PO corresponding to the computing terminal are removed from the terminal identifier, the remaining data bits may be used to calculate the group in which the terminal is located. Since one PO can correspond to multiple terminals, the terminal is classified by the PO. In this application, the grouping of the terminal in the paging process and the PO corresponding to the terminal can be configured at the same time.
  • the above two factors can be determined by the following factors: the first factor, that is, the position of the data bit used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, which can be determined according to the above constant N; the second factor, that is, The number of data bits for calculating the packet information can be determined according to the number of groups K of the packets.
  • FIG. 6 shows a possible schematic diagram of the number of data bits used to calculate packet information and the location in the terminal identification.
  • the minimum log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate the PO or paging window corresponding to the terminal, where N is the number of POs.
  • the data bits used to calculate the packet information are: adjacent to the lowest log 2 N bits Bits. Indicates that the log 2 K is rounded up.
  • the data bits for calculating the group information determined according to the group number K and the constant N may be different from the above examples, and the data bits for calculating the group information may be determined in a plurality of manners.
  • the manner of determining the data bits used to calculate the packet information may be determined by the network device, determined by the terminal, or agreed between the network device and the terminal, or may be predefined by a standard protocol.
  • a specific calculation strategy may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed between a network device and a terminal.
  • the truncation identifier of the terminal is obtained by intercepting a partial segment of the terminal identification. Since the truncation identifier is a part of the terminal identifier, the truncation identifier is not unique, that is, the truncation identifiers of the multiple terminals may be the same, and one truncation identifier may correspond to the plurality of terminals.
  • the truncated identifier of the terminal may be determined according to at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the truncated identifier, the location of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier, the identifier of the terminal, the number of POs, the number of synchronization signal blocks, or the DRX cycle. length.
  • part or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol or pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the manner of determining the truncated identifier of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be multiple, may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the following example illustrates how to determine the truncation identifier of the terminal according to at least one piece of information described above.
  • the truncation identifier of the terminal can be selected by the following two factors: truncating the number of data bits of the identifier, and truncating the position of the identifier in the terminal identifier.
  • the above two factors may be determined according to the following manner: the first factor, that is, the number of data bits of the truncated identifier, may be determined according to the false alarm probability, or determined according to the number of terminals; the second factor, that is, the truncated identifier is The location in the terminal identification may be determined according to N, where N is a constant, and N may be determined by at least one of the number of POs, the length of DRX, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
  • the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device, so that the network device sends a paging message to the terminal, but the terminal is not the paged terminal, and may be referred to as a false alarm.
  • a possible implementation manner is to increase the number of data bits of the truncated identifier in order to reduce the false alarm probability when the false alarm probability is high.
  • a possible implementation manner is to reduce the number of data bits of the truncated identifier when the number of terminals is large. With this implementation, the signaling overhead of the network device during the paging process can be reduced.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of the number of data bits of the truncated identifier of a possible terminal and the location of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier.
  • the truncated identifier of the terminal may occupy M bits, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is adjacent to the lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier.
  • the lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate a PO or a paging window corresponding to the terminal.
  • the truncated identifier of the terminal may be: the highest or lowest M bits in the S-TMSI identified by the terminal, and the lowest log 2 N of the terminal identifier, which is not limited to the number and location of possible data bits of the truncated identifier in the above example. Successive or non-contiguous M bits of adjacent bits.
  • the start position or the end position of the terminal truncation identifier may also be adjacent to the bit used in the terminal identifier for calculating the PO.
  • M and the bit used to calculate the PO may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the manner of determining the truncated identifier of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be different from the foregoing example, and the manner for determining the truncated identifier may be multiple.
  • the manner of determining the truncated identifier may be determined by the network device, determined by the terminal, or agreed between the network device and the terminal, or may be predefined by a standard protocol.
  • the selection of the terminal truncation identifier may be based on a region, or may be based on a PO, or may be based on both a region and a PO, as described in detail below.
  • the terminal truncation identifier is based on a region.
  • the jurisdiction of the network device includes multiple sub-areas, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is related to the sub-area in which the terminal is located.
  • the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 1 are the same, and the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 2 are the same.
  • the terminal truncation identifier is based on a PO.
  • two factors when a terminal corresponding to different POs selects a truncation identifier may be different.
  • the foregoing two factors of the multiple terminals corresponding to the first PO may be: occupying K1 adjacent bits, and the starting position of the truncated identifier is the starting position of the terminal identifier;
  • the above two factors of the multiple terminals corresponding to the two POs may be: occupying K2 adjacent bits, and the ending position of the truncated identifier is the ending position of the terminal identifier.
  • the terminal truncation identification is based on both the zone and the PO.
  • the jurisdiction of the network device includes multiple sub-areas, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is related to the following two sub-areas in which the terminal is located, and the PO corresponding to the terminal.
  • the two factors of the plurality of terminals located in the sub-area 1 and corresponding to the first PO are the same; the two factors located in the sub-area 1 and the plurality of terminals corresponding to the second PO are the same.
  • the index of the terminal can be used for paging.
  • the index of the terminal is not unique, that is, the indexes of multiple terminals may be the same, and one index may correspond to multiple terminals.
  • the index of the terminal may be a complete terminal identifier, or may be part of the terminal identifier, or may be only an index value, which is described below.
  • the index of the terminal is a complete terminal identifier
  • one index corresponds to one terminal.
  • the terminal index is obtained by intercepting the partial identifier of the terminal identifier, and the index of the terminal may be determined according to at least one of the following information: length of the index The location of the index in the terminal identifier, the identifier of the terminal, the number of POs, the number of synchronization signal blocks, or the length of the DRX cycle.
  • part or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol or pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the manner of determining the index of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be multiple, may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
  • the following example illustrates how to determine the terminal index based on at least one of the above information.
  • the terminal index may be selected according to the following factors: the number of data bits of the terminal index, and the location of the terminal index in the terminal identifier.
  • the determination of the above two factors can be referred to the relevant description in the key technical point (2), and will not be described here.
  • the index of the terminal is only one index value.
  • one index corresponds to one terminal, that is, the index of the terminal is based on the terminal identifier.
  • the index of the terminal may be based on the area, or may be based on the PO, or may be based on the area and the PO at the same time. Description.
  • the index of the terminal is based on the region.
  • a network device includes a plurality of sub-areas within its jurisdiction, and an index of the terminal is related to a sub-area in which the terminal is located.
  • the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 1 are the same, and the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 2 are the same.
  • the terminal index values in the sub-area 1 are the same, and the terminal index values in the sub-area 2 are the same.
  • the index of the terminal is based on the PO.
  • the two factors of the terminal corresponding to the first PO are the same; the two factors of the terminal corresponding to the second PO are the same.
  • the terminal index values corresponding to the first PO are the same in one DRX cycle, and the terminal index values corresponding to the second PO are the same.
  • the index of the terminal is based on both the region and the PO.
  • the plurality of sub-areas are included in the jurisdiction of the network device, and the two factors corresponding to the second case are located in the sub-area 1 and the plurality of terminals corresponding to the first PO are the same, and are located in the sub-area 2 and the second
  • the above two factors of the plurality of terminals corresponding to the POs are the same.
  • the plurality of sub-areas are included in the jurisdiction of the network device, and the index values of the plurality of terminals corresponding to the first PO are the same in the sub-area 1 and are located in the sub-area 2 and the second one.
  • the index values of the plurality of terminals corresponding to the PO are the same.
  • the first message is a paging indication.
  • the first message can be implemented in the following three ways.
  • the first message may be used to indicate whether each group includes a paged terminal, that is, the first message may be used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
  • the value of each bit of the first message may indicate whether each group has a terminal being paged.
  • how many bits are used to indicate a group which can be agreed between the network device and the terminal, or can be predefined by a standard protocol.
  • each group indicated by the first message may be a group obtained by grouping multiple terminals in a tracking area, or may be grouped by multiple terminals within a network device jurisdiction. Each group may also be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals in one PO.
  • the first message includes 16 bits, and each bit has a value of 1100011000110000. Wherein, one bit represents a group, and a value of "1" in each bit indicates that a terminal in the corresponding group is paged, and a value of "0" indicates that no terminal in the corresponding group is paged. If the number of groups of the plurality of terminal groups in the PO is 16, the first message indicates that the terminals in the first, second, sixth, seventh, eleventh, and twelveth groups are paged, that is, the first and second ends. The terminals of groups 6, 6, 11, and 12 all include a paged terminal.
  • the respective groups indicated by the first message may be groups obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of tracking areas, respectively, or may be multiple network devices.
  • Each of the plurality of terminals included in the jurisdiction is grouped and obtained, and each of the plurality of terminals included in the plurality of paging occasions is separately grouped.
  • the number of multiple terminal groups within each PO may be different for each tracking area, each network device jurisdiction, that is, in the first message, for indicating each tracking area, each The number of data bits in the network device jurisdiction, whether each group in each PO includes the paged terminal may be different.
  • multiple terminal groups included within two POs within one DRX cycle are grouped.
  • the plurality of terminals in the first PO are divided into 10 groups, and the plurality of terminals in the second PO are divided into 6 groups.
  • the first message includes 16 bits, the first 10 bits are used to indicate each group in the first PO, and the last 6 bits are used to indicate each group in the second PO.
  • the value of each bit is 1100011000110000. Wherein, one bit represents a group, and a value of "1" in each bit indicates that a terminal in the corresponding group is paged, and a value of "0" indicates that no terminal in the corresponding group is paged.
  • the first message is used to indicate that the first, second, sixth, and seventh groups of terminals in the first PO include the paged terminal, and the first and second groups of terminals in the second PO include the paged terminal. .
  • the first message may include a truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal.
  • the truncation identifier can refer to the related description in the key technical point (2).
  • the truncation identifier of the terminal 1 is "0011". Then the first message uses the value of 4 bits to "0011" to indicate that the terminal with the truncated identifier "0011" may be paged.
  • the first message may include an index of at least one paged terminal.
  • the index of the terminal can refer to the related description in the key technology point (3).
  • the first message when the terminal index is part of the terminal identifier, the first message may include a partial identifier of the at least one paged terminal, and when the terminal index is only an index value, the first message may include at least one paged terminal. Index value.
  • the first message may be sent by using a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the paging information or a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) of the paging information, or by using a control The resource collection (CORESET) is sent.
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • CORESET control The resource collection
  • the first configuration information can be implemented in the following three manners.
  • the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine the group in which the terminal is located, and the first configuration information may include at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, and the first The number of data bits indicating each group in the message, the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information, the position of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks .
  • the first message here corresponds to the first implementation of the first message in the above-mentioned key technology point (4).
  • the first configuration information when used to configure the number of data bits of the first message, the following two configuration schemes are available.
  • the first configuration scheme is directly indicated by the number represented by each bit.
  • the first configuration information may indicate the number of data bits of the first message by using 4 bits, and the value of the 4 bits may be any one of 0001-1111, and may respectively indicate the numbers 1-16, that is, the first The number of data bits of the message is any one of 1-16.
  • the second configuration scheme indicates the configuration scheme of the first message by the number of each bit identifier. For example, there are four configuration schemes for predefining the first message, and the number of data bits of the corresponding first message is: 8, 10, 12 or 18.
  • the first configuration information may indicate the configuration scheme by using two bits. When the value of the two bits is 00, the first configuration scheme is indicated, that is, the number of data bits of the first message is 8, and the value of the two bits is 01. Indicates a second configuration scheme, that is, the number of data bits of the first message is 10, and so on.
  • the first configuration information may be configured by other forms to configure the number of data bits of the first message, which is not limited in this application.
  • the number of groups associated with the first message is the number K of groups of terminal packets. There are two cases of the number of groups associated with the first message, which are described in detail below.
  • the number of groups associated with the first message may be the number of groups in which multiple terminals in a tracking area are grouped, or may be the number of groups in which multiple terminals in a network device jurisdiction are grouped. It can be the number of groups that are grouped by multiple terminals within one PO.
  • the first configuration information may be related to the total number of terminals currently in the range of one tracking area when configuring the number of groups associated with the first message, or may be in the jurisdiction of a network device.
  • the total number of terminals within the correlation is also related to the total number of terminals in the current PO.
  • One possible way is that the more the total number of terminals in a tracking area is, the more the number of groups associated with the configured first message; the more the total number of terminals within the jurisdiction of a network device, the more the configuration The greater the number of groups associated with the first message, the greater the number of groups associated with the configured first message when the total number of terminals corresponding to one PO is greater.
  • Another possible way is that the more the number of paging terminals in a tracking area is, the more the number of groups associated with the configured first message; when the paging terminal in the jurisdiction of a network device The greater the number, the greater the number of groups associated with the configured first message; the greater the number of paging terminals corresponding to a PO, the greater the number of groups associated with the configured first message.
  • the first configuration information configures the number of data bits of the first message or the number of groups associated with the first message
  • the number of data bits indicating a group in the first message may be agreed by the network device and the terminal, or may be predefined by a standard protocol.
  • the number of groups associated with the first message may include the number of groups that are respectively grouped by multiple terminals included in the range of multiple tracking areas, and may also include multiple terminals included in the jurisdiction of multiple network devices.
  • the number of groups to be grouped may further include a number of groups in which a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of paging occasions are separately grouped.
  • each tracking area, each network device jurisdiction, and the number of groups of multiple terminal groups within each PO may be different.
  • the first configuration information configures any one of the number of data bits of the first message in the first message, or the number of groups associated with the first message
  • another item may be based on The formula is calculated.
  • a DR is included in a DRX cycle, and each group associated with the first message includes: a K1 group in which a plurality of terminals corresponding to the first PO are divided, and a K2 group in which multiple terminals corresponding to the second PO are divided into .
  • the number of data bits indicating a group may be agreed by the network device and the terminal, or may be determined by a standard protocol. Pre-defined.
  • the first configuration information may also be configured to send a time-frequency resource location of the physical downlink control channel of the paging indication (first message), or The time-frequency resource location of the channel for sending the paging indication is used to indicate that the terminal receives the paging indication.
  • the first configuration information may be configured to configure a time-frequency resource location of the control channel that sends the first message; when the first message is sent by using the PDSCH, the first configuration information may be configured to configure a time-frequency of the control channel of the PDSCH. Resource location.
  • the control channel may be a PDCCH, a control resource set, or a common search space.
  • the first configuration information is configured with at least one item of information: the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, used for calculation
  • the number of data bits of the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks, may be determined by the calculation policy according to the first configuration information.
  • For the group in which it is located refer to the related description in the key technical point (1), and details are not described herein.
  • the terminal may determine, according to the predefined or agreed information and the first configuration information, the terminal is located.
  • the terminal may determine, according to the predefined or agreed information and the first configuration information, the terminal is located.
  • the first configuration information may be used to configure a truncated identifier of the terminal.
  • the first configuration information may directly include a truncated identifier of the terminal.
  • the first configuration information may include at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the truncated identifier of the terminal, the location of the truncated identifier of the terminal in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or The number of sync signal blocks.
  • the terminal may determine its truncated identifier according to the first configuration information, and specifically refer to the related description of the key technical point (2).
  • the first configuration information may be used to configure an index of the terminal.
  • the index of the terminal is the second case (part of the terminal identifier) and the third case (only one index value) of the above-mentioned key technical points (3), which are described below.
  • the index of the terminal is part of the terminal identifier, and the first configuration information is used to indicate the index of the terminal.
  • the first configuration information may directly include an index of the terminal.
  • the first configuration information may include at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the index of the terminal, the location of the index of the terminal in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or a synchronization signal. The number of blocks.
  • the index of the terminal is only one index value
  • the first configuration information is used to indicate the index value of the terminal.
  • the first configuration information may include Table 1, and the index values corresponding to the respective terminals are shown in Table 1.
  • the first configuration information may be configured by any one or any of the following: system information (SI), master information block (MIB), system information block (system) Information block (SIB), remaining minimum system information (RMSI), other system information (OSI), downlink control information (DCI), media access layer control element (medium access) Control-control element (MAC-CE), radio resource control (RRC) information.
  • SI system information
  • MIB master information block
  • SIB system information block
  • SIB system information block
  • RMSI remaining minimum system information
  • OSI other system information
  • DCI downlink control information
  • MAC-CE media access layer control element
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the network device may send a paging indication to the plurality of terminals.
  • the plurality of terminals receiving the first message send an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the network device can learn the beam where the paged terminal is located according to the uplink signal, and send a paging message by using the beam where the paged terminal is located.
  • the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • the network device sends a first message to the terminal.
  • the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
  • the network device can send the first message to the terminal at the beginning of the paging process.
  • the base station for example, gNB
  • the base station for example, gNB
  • the size of the first message and the specific content may be configured by the network device.
  • the application does not limit the application.
  • the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • multiple terminals that receive the first message send uplink signals to the network device. Further, the terminals corresponding to different POs may send uplink signals to the network device by using different random access time-frequency resources.
  • the uplink signal sent by the terminal may be a preamble sent by the random access procedure to the network device.
  • terminals in different POs send different preamble sequences to network devices, or may use different time-frequency resources to transmit preamble sequences, so that network devices distinguish terminals in different POs.
  • the network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the network device may determine, according to the uplink signal sent by the terminal, a beam range where the terminal is located, or a random access resource region corresponding to the terminal, or antenna port information corresponding to the terminal.
  • the beam where the terminal is located is a beam whose transmission range can cover the terminal.
  • the network device receives the uplink signal by scanning each beam. After receiving the uplink signal, the network device may determine a beam(s) capable of receiving the uplink signal, and the transmission range of the beam covers all terminals transmitting the uplink signal. Since the terminal that transmits the uplink signal includes the paged terminal, the transmission range of the beam covers the paged terminal.
  • the network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the transmission range of the beam where the terminal is located covers the paged terminal, and the beam is scanned by using the beam where the terminal is located, and the paging message is sent to ensure that the paged terminal receives the beam direction in the direction of the beam. Paging message.
  • a plurality of terminals can receive the paging message.
  • the terminal checks whether the information of the paged terminal included in the paging message is the same as its own information. For example, it can check whether the paged IMSI in the paging message is the same as its own IMSI. If the information is the same, the paging message is sent to the terminal, and the terminal performs corresponding operations according to the paging message. If different, the paging message is not sent to the terminal, and the terminal waits for the next search. The arrival of the message.
  • the paging message can be used to send paging information to the paged terminal, notify the terminal system information to update, notify the terminal to receive the earthquake, the tsunami warning system (ETWS) or the commercial mobile (commercial mobile alert service, CMAS), etc.
  • EWS tsunami warning system
  • CMAS commercial mobile alert service
  • the network device in the paging process, if the specific direction of the paged terminal is not known, it is necessary to perform beam scanning on all the beams (ie, the total number of beams corresponding to the network device), and send a page. Message.
  • the network device needs to limit the energy of the paging message to each beam corresponding to the network device by using the beamforming technology, and then send the paging message to ensure that the paged terminal receives the search. Call the message.
  • Each beam has a large beamforming overhead.
  • the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam to perform beam scanning and send a paging message.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
  • This embodiment corresponds to the scenario grouped in the above key technical point (1).
  • the network device may send the first configuration information and the first message to multiple terminals.
  • the plurality of terminals determine the group in which the group is located according to the first configuration information, and determine, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged. All or a portion of the terminals within the group including the paged terminal may send an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the network device sends paging information according to the uplink signal.
  • the implementation manner of the first message is the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4)
  • the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the first implementation manner in the key technical point (5).
  • the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • the network device sends the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal.
  • the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, and the first message is used to indicate whether the group where the terminal is located has a terminal. Was paged.
  • the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
  • the first configuration information and the first message may be sent simultaneously or separately, and the application does not limit the application.
  • the first configuration information sent by the network device may be different or the same. That is, the network device may dynamically configure at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and the information for calculating the grouping information.
  • the first configuration information may configure the number of bits of the first message to be X1
  • the first configuration information may configure the number of bits of the first message to be X2.
  • the network device when the network device configures the at least one piece of information by using the first configuration information, the network device may dynamically configure according to the current actual situation (the total number of terminals or the number of pages to be paged), and may refer to key technical points (5).
  • the current actual situation the total number of terminals or the number of pages to be paged
  • the network device may dynamically configure according to the current actual situation (the total number of terminals or the number of pages to be paged)
  • the network device may dynamically configure according to the current actual situation (the total number of terminals or the number of pages to be paged), and may refer to key technical points (5).
  • introduce the first message introduce the first message.
  • the implementation of the first message may refer to the related description of the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4), and details are not described herein.
  • the first message may be sent with a system modification related message.
  • the first message and the system modification related message can be included at the same time.
  • the system modification related message may include at least one of the following: information notifying the terminal system information update, notifying the terminal to receive the earthquake, information of the tsunami warning system, or information of the commercial mobile alarm.
  • the terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, the group that is located.
  • the terminal can determine the group in which it is located according to the first configuration information. Since each piece of information configured by the first configuration information can be dynamically changed, each group that is determined by the terminal according to the first configuration information may dynamically change.
  • the terminal may further determine the corresponding PO according to the first configuration information. After determining the PO, in the paging process, the terminal may monitor the PO corresponding to the terminal in the DRX cycle, and check whether there is a paging message, a first message, or other Paging information.
  • the PO where the terminal is located may be related to the period of the configuration information of the PO. Since it is possible to include the configuration information of the PO in the RMSI information or the OSI information, for example, the PO in which the terminal is located may be related to the period of the RMSI, or the period of other system information.
  • the terminal determines, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged.
  • the terminal may determine, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged.
  • the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • all or part of the terminals included in the group in which the paged terminal is located transmit an uplink signal to the network device. It can be understood that, in step S204, the implementation of the uplink signal sent by the terminal is similar to the step S102 in the first embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
  • the network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
  • step S205 is similar to the step S103 in the first embodiment, and the network device receives the uplink signal by scanning each beam. After receiving the uplink signal, the network device may determine a beam(s) capable of receiving the uplink signal, and the transmission range of the beam covers all terminals transmitting the uplink signal. Since the terminal transmitting the uplink signal includes the paged terminal, the transmission range of the beam covers the paged terminal.
  • terminals in different POs send different preamble sequences to network devices, or may transmit preamble sequences using different time-frequency resources, so that the network devices distinguish terminals in different POs.
  • the network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the transmission range of the beam where the terminal is located covers the paged terminal, and the beam is scanned by using the beam where the terminal is located, and the paging message is sent to ensure that the paged terminal receives the beam direction in the direction of the beam. Paging message.
  • the function of the paging message is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the related description can be referred to.
  • there are two possibilities for implementing a paging message which is described in detail below.
  • the paging message includes a terminal list of the paged terminal.
  • the network device uses the beam where the terminal is located to perform beam scanning and sends a paging message
  • the plurality of terminals in the group where the paged terminal is located can receive the paging message.
  • Each terminal of the plurality of terminals can view whether the terminal identifier of the paging terminal identifier list is the same as the terminal identifier of the terminal, and if yes, the terminal is a paged terminal, and the terminal performs corresponding according to the paging message. Operation.
  • the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one of the paged terminals.
  • the page message may include a list of truncated identifiers of the paged terminals or an index list of the pages to be paged.
  • Each of the plurality of terminals can check whether it is a paged terminal: if the truncated identifier list of the paged terminal includes a truncation identifier of a terminal, or the index list of the paged terminal includes a terminal Index, then, the terminal may be the paged terminal. The following explains why the terminal is likely to be the paged terminal and how the terminal determines whether it is the paged terminal.
  • the terminal Since the truncation identifier or the index is not unique, even if the truncation identifier of a terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the paged terminal, or the index of a terminal and the index of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is not necessarily Paging terminal.
  • the network device may send an acknowledgement message to the terminal in message 4 (MSG4), and the acknowledgement message may carry the indication information of the paged terminal, and the indication information may be It is the complete identifier of the paged terminal and indicates whether the terminal is paged.
  • the terminal After receiving the acknowledgement message, the terminal may determine whether it is a paged terminal. For example, if the identifier of the terminal and the identifier of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is the paged terminal. If the terminal is a paged terminal, the terminal performs a corresponding operation according to the paging message.
  • a timer timer or threshold can be set. Both the network device and the terminal can calculate that the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device within the time indicated by the timer, but the terminal is not the number of times of the paged terminal of the current paging. When the number of times exceeds the threshold, the terminal can Applying to the network device for the group in which the terminal is replaced, or the network device may directly determine the first configuration information for the terminal reconfiguration, and the terminal re-determines the group in which the terminal is located.
  • the network device reconfigures the at least one piece of information for the terminal by using the first configuration information, which can reduce the probability that the terminal sends the uplink signal but is not the paged terminal, that is, reduces the false alarm probability.
  • the timer timer or the threshold may not be set.
  • the terminal requests the network device to replace the group where the terminal is located, or the network device directly reconfigures the related information for the terminal.
  • the network device can configure the number of occupied bits of the first message and the number of groups associated with the first message according to actual conditions, thereby dynamically configuring the first message.
  • all or part of the terminals in the group in which the paged terminal is located send an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam. Perform beam scanning and send a paging message.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
  • step S201 the network device does not need to send the first configuration information to the terminal, and does not include step S202, the terminal does not need to determine the group according to the first configuration information.
  • step S202 the terminal does not need to determine the group according to the first configuration information.
  • the network device does not need to send the first configuration information to the terminal, the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and is used to calculate the grouping.
  • At least one of the number of data bits of the information, the position of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks may be agreed by the network side and the terminal, or may be Predefined by standard protocols.
  • the terminal grouping manner can be known that the terminal can determine the group in the group through the information agreed by the network device side and the terminal, or the information predefined by the standard protocol.
  • the first message is also used to indicate whether the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
  • the implementation of the first message can refer to the related description of the first implementation manner of the key technical point (4).
  • all or part of the terminals in the group in which the paging terminal is located send an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal).
  • the beam is used for beam scanning to send a paging message.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
  • This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the truncation identifier in the above-mentioned key technical point (2) and the terminal index in (3).
  • the network device may send the first configuration information and the paging message to the multiple terminals.
  • the plurality of terminals determine their own truncation identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and determine whether to be paged according to the paging message.
  • the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (5).
  • the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • the network device sends the first configuration information and the paging message to the terminal.
  • the first configuration information is used to configure a truncated identifier or index of the terminal, and the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal.
  • the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
  • the first configuration information and the paging message may be sent simultaneously or separately, and the application does not limit the application.
  • the first configuration information sent by the network device may be different or the same. That is, the network device can dynamically configure the truncated identifier or index of the terminal. For a terminal, the truncated identifier or index of the terminal can be dynamically changed.
  • the specific timing for the network device to send the first configuration information may be multiple.
  • the following is a brief description of several possible specific occasions for sending the first configuration information.
  • the network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal by using MIB information, DCI information, system information or RMSI.
  • the truncation identifier or index corresponding to one terminal may be different, and the first configuration information may be dynamically changed or dynamically configured.
  • the network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal through RRC signaling, DCI, and MAC-CE.
  • the truncation identifier or index corresponding to one terminal may be different, and the first configuration information may be dynamically changed or dynamically configured.
  • the third type when the terminal enters a TA area or is powered on, that is, the terminal initiates an attach request, and when registering with the MME, reports the registration information (the old TA area identifier, the terminal identifier, the specific DRX period, etc.) to the network device (for example, the MME). Afterwards, the network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal.
  • the first configuration information may be sent only once, and after being sent once, the truncation identifier or index corresponding to the terminal may not change any more.
  • the specific configuration is not limited to the specific time when the first configuration information is sent.
  • the network device may also send the first configuration information in other occasions, and the application does not impose any limitation.
  • the terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal.
  • the terminal may determine its truncated identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and specifically refer to the related descriptions of the second implementation manner in the key technology (2) and the key technical point (5), or Refer to the relevant description of the third implementation of key technology (3) and key technology points (5).
  • the terminal determines, according to the paging message, whether the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or whether the index of the terminal is the same as the index of the at least one paging terminal.
  • the terminal is to the The network device sends an uplink signal.
  • the paging message includes a truncation identifier or index of at least one paged terminal.
  • the page message may include a list of truncated identifiers of the paged terminals or an index list of the pages to be paged.
  • Each of the plurality of terminals that receive the paging message can check whether it is a paged terminal: if the truncated identifier list of the paged terminal includes a truncation identifier of a terminal, or an index list of the paged terminal The index of a terminal is included, and then the terminal may be a paged terminal. The following explains why the terminal is likely to be the paged terminal and how the terminal determines whether it is the paged terminal.
  • the terminal Since the truncation identifier or the index is not unique, even if the truncation identifier of a terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the paged terminal, or even if the index of a terminal and the index of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is not necessarily the same.
  • the terminal is being paged.
  • the network device may send an acknowledgement message to the terminal in message 4 (MSG4), and the acknowledgement message may carry the indication information of the paged terminal, and the indication information may be It is the complete identifier of the paged terminal and indicates whether the terminal is paged.
  • the terminal After receiving the acknowledgement message, the terminal may determine whether it is a paged terminal. For example, if the identifier of the terminal and the identifier of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is the paged terminal.
  • the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device to respond to the behavior of the network device transmitting the paging message.
  • the uplink signal sent by the terminal may be a preamble sent by the random access procedure to the network device.
  • a timer timer or threshold may be set. Both the network device and the terminal can calculate that the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device within the time indicated by the timer, but the terminal is not the number of times of the paged terminal of the current paging. When the number of times exceeds the threshold, the terminal can Apply to the network device for the truncation identifier of the replacement terminal, or the network device can directly configure a new truncation identifier for the terminal.
  • a possible way is that the network device configures a long truncation identifier for the terminal by using the first configuration information, which can reduce the probability that the terminal sends the uplink signal, but the terminal is not the paged terminal, that is, the false alarm probability is reduced. .
  • the timer timer or the threshold may not be set.
  • the terminal requests the network device to change the truncation identifier of the terminal, or the network device directly configures a new truncation identifier for the terminal. .
  • the network device can dynamically configure the truncation identifier or index of each terminal by using the first configuration information.
  • the paging message is intercepted or indexed, and the paging message carries less content than the full identity paging terminal of the terminal, which reduces the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the paging message is sent.
  • This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the terminal index in the truncated identifier and the key technical point (3) in the above key technical point (2).
  • the network device may send the first configuration information and the first message to multiple terminals.
  • the plurality of terminals determine their own truncation identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and determine whether to send an uplink signal to the network device according to the first message.
  • the network device can learn the beam where the paged terminal is located according to the uplink signal, and send a paging message by using the beam where the paged terminal is located.
  • the implementation manner of the first message is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (4), and the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the second key technical point (5).
  • Implementation and third implementation are the implementation manner of the first message and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (4), and the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the second key technical point (5).
  • the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • the network device sends the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal.
  • the first configuration information is used to configure a truncated identifier of the terminal, or an index of the terminal.
  • the first message includes a truncation of the at least one paged terminal. Identification or index.
  • the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
  • the first configuration information and the first message may be sent simultaneously or separately, and the application does not limit the application.
  • the first configuration information sent by the network device may be different or the same. That is, the network device can dynamically configure the truncated identifier or index of the terminal. For a terminal, the truncated identifier or index of the terminal can be dynamically changed.
  • the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (5).
  • the timing of transmitting the first configuration information refer to the related description in Embodiment 4.
  • the implementation manner of the first message is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (4).
  • the timing of sending the first message refer to the related description of step S101 in Embodiment 1.
  • the terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index.
  • the terminal determines, according to the first message, whether the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or whether the index of the terminal is the same as the index of the at least one paged terminal.
  • the terminal sends an uplink to the network device. signal.
  • the terminal is classified by the truncation identifier or the index.
  • the terminal After receiving the first message, the terminal checks whether the truncated identifier of the first message is the same as the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal included in the first message, or the index of the self and the at least one of the first message are found. Whether the index of the calling terminal is the same. If they are the same, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the terminal that transmits the uplink signal includes the paged terminal. It can be understood that, in step S404, the implementation of the uplink signal sent by the terminal is similar to the step S102 in the first embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
  • the network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
  • step S405 is similar to the step S103 in the first embodiment, and the network device receives the uplink signal by scanning each beam. After receiving the uplink signal, the network device may determine a beam(s) capable of receiving the uplink signal, and the transmission range of the beam covers all terminals transmitting the uplink signal. Since the terminal transmitting the uplink signal includes the paged terminal, the transmission range of the beam covers the paged terminal.
  • the network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the transmission range of the beam where the terminal is located covers the paged terminal, and the beam is scanned by using the beam where the terminal is located, and the paging message is sent to ensure that the paged terminal receives the beam direction in the direction of the beam. Paging message.
  • the function of the paging message is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the related description can be referred to.
  • the implementation of the paging message may be the same as the first one in the second embodiment, which is described in detail below.
  • the paging message includes a terminal list of the paged terminal.
  • the network device uses the beam where the terminal is located to perform beam scanning and sends a paging message
  • the plurality of terminals in the group where the paged terminal is located can receive the paging message.
  • Each terminal of the plurality of terminals can view whether the terminal identifier of the paging terminal identifier list is the same as the terminal identifier of the terminal, and if yes, the terminal is a paged terminal, and the terminal performs corresponding according to the paging message. Operation.
  • the network device can dynamically configure the truncation identifier or index of each terminal by using the first configuration information.
  • the truncated identifier and all or part of the terminal (including the paged terminal) of the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the index and the same all or part of the at least one paged terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the network device can know that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam to perform beam scanning and send a paging message.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
  • This embodiment corresponds to the scenario grouped in the above key technical point (1).
  • each terminal autonomously determines a data bit for calculating the packet information, and reports the data bit to the network device by using the second message.
  • the network device may send a first message to the plurality of terminals, the plurality of terminals determining, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is included includes the paged terminal. All or a portion of the terminals within the group including the paged terminal may send an uplink signal to the network device. The network device sends paging information according to the uplink signal.
  • the implementation manner of the first message is the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4).
  • the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • the terminal sends a second message to the network device.
  • the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating the group information.
  • the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
  • the terminal When the terminal enters a TA area or is powered on, that is, when the terminal initiates an attach request and registers with the MME, when the network device (for example, the MME) reports the registration information (terminal identifier, specific DRX cycle, etc.), the second information and the registration are performed.
  • the information is reported at the same time.
  • the second information may be sent only once, and once transmitted, the data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating the packet information may not change any more.
  • each terminal autonomously determines data bits for calculating packet information.
  • the length and location of the data bits determined by each terminal for calculating the packet information may be different, and the present application is not limited.
  • the terminal can determine the data bits used for calculating the group information according to the autonomous determination, which is equivalent to the group in which the autonomous determination is performed.
  • the network device determines, according to the second message, the group where the terminal is located.
  • the network device can learn the group in which the plurality of terminals are respectively located.
  • the network device sends a first message to the terminal.
  • the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
  • the network device can notify each terminal which groups have terminals in the group through the first message.
  • the implementation of the first message may refer to the related description of the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4), and details are not described herein.
  • the terminal determines, according to the first message, whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
  • the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the implementation of the steps S504-S507 is the same as the implementation of the steps S203-S206 in the second embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
  • the terminal autonomously determines the data bits used to calculate the packet information, and the implementation manner is more flexible.
  • all or part of the terminals in the group in which the paged terminal is located send an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam.
  • Perform beam scanning and send a paging message where the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
  • This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the truncation identifier in the above-mentioned key technical point (2) and the terminal index in (3).
  • each terminal independently determines its own truncation identifier or index, and reports the second message to the network device.
  • the network device may send a paging message to the plurality of terminals, where the paging message includes a list of truncated identifiers of the at least one paged terminal or an index of the at least one paged terminal.
  • the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • the terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or index of the terminal.
  • the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
  • the terminal When the terminal enters a TA area or is powered on, that is, when the terminal initiates an attach request, when the terminal registers with the MME, when the network device (for example, the MME) reports the registration information (terminal identifier, specific DRX cycle, etc.), the second information and Registration information is reported at the same time.
  • the second information may be sent only once, and after being sent once, the truncation identifier or index corresponding to the terminal may not change any more.
  • each terminal autonomously determines a truncation identifier or index.
  • the length and location of the truncated identifier determined by each terminal may be different, and the application does not limit the application.
  • the network device determines, according to the second message, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal.
  • the network device sends a paging message to the terminal.
  • the paging message includes a truncation identifier of at least one paged terminal or an index of at least one paged terminal.
  • the implementation of the paging message is the same as that in the fourth embodiment, and reference may be made to the related description.
  • the terminal determines, according to the paging message, whether the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or whether the index of the terminal is the same as the index of the at least one paging terminal.
  • the terminal is to the The network device sends an uplink signal.
  • the terminal autonomously determines the truncation identifier or index and reports it to the network device.
  • the paging message In the paging message, the paging message is intercepted or indexed, and the paging message carries less content than the full identity paging terminal of the terminal, which reduces the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the paging message is sent.
  • This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the truncation identifier in the above-mentioned key technical point (2) and the terminal index in (3).
  • each terminal independently determines its own truncated identifier or index, and reports the second message to the network device.
  • the network device may send a first message to the multiple terminals, and the multiple terminals determine, according to the first message, whether to send an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the network device can learn the beam where the paged terminal is located according to the uplink signal, and send a paging message by using the beam where the paged terminal is located.
  • the implementation manner of the first message is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (4).
  • the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
  • the terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or index of the terminal.
  • step S701 is the same as step S601 in the seventh embodiment, and reference may be made to the related description.
  • the network device determines, according to the second message, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal.
  • the network device sends a first message to the terminal, where the first message includes a truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal.
  • the network device may obtain a truncated identifier or index of each of the multiple terminals.
  • the network device may notify the truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal of each terminal by using the first message.
  • the implementation of the first message may refer to the related descriptions of the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the key technical point (4), and details are not described herein.
  • the terminal determines, according to the first message, whether a truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as a truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or whether an index of the terminal is an index of the at least one paged terminal. the same.
  • the terminal sends the uplink to the network device. signal.
  • the network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
  • the terminal autonomously determines the truncation identifier or index and reports it to the network device.
  • the truncated identifier and all or part of the terminal (including the paged terminal) of the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the index and the same all or part of the at least one paged terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the network device can know that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam to perform beam scanning and send a paging message.
  • the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
  • Figures 8A-8D illustrate the present application providing a wireless communication system, terminal, and network device.
  • the terminal may be the terminal in the embodiment of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2
  • the network device may be the network device in the embodiment of FIG. 1 or FIG. 3
  • the wireless communication system may be the wireless communication system described in FIG. Several possible implementations of the wireless communication system are described separately below.
  • the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 710 and a network device 720.
  • the terminal 710 may include: a receiving unit 711, a determining unit 712, and a transmitting unit 713.
  • the receiving unit 711 is configured to receive first configuration information and a first message that are sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate the terminal Whether the group in which the group is located is paged;
  • a determining unit 712 configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a group in which the terminal is located;
  • the sending unit 713 is configured to send an uplink signal to the network device if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
  • the network device 720 may include a receiving unit 721 and a transmitting unit 722.
  • the sending unit 722 is configured to send the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate that the terminal is located Whether the group has a terminal being paged;
  • the receiving unit 721 is configured to receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged;
  • the sending unit 722 is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
  • the first configuration information may include at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a number of groups associated with the first message, and each of the first messages The number of data bits of the group, the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the synchronization signal The number of blocks.
  • the terminal determines that the group n where the terminal is located is:
  • the UEID is an identifier of the terminal
  • K is a number of groups associated with the first message
  • N is a constant
  • N passes the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the synchronization signal. At least one of the number of blocks is determined. .
  • the first configuration information is configured by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control element.
  • the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 720, and a network device 730.
  • the terminal 720 may include: a receiving unit 721, a determining unit 722, and a sending unit 723, where
  • the receiving unit 721 is configured to receive first configuration information and a paging message sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes at least one paged terminal. Truncated identifier or index;
  • a determining unit 722 configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal;
  • the sending unit 723 is configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, The network device sends an uplink signal.
  • the network device 730 may include: a receiving unit 731, and a sending unit 732, where
  • the sending unit 732 is configured to send the first configuration information and the paging message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes a truncation of the at least one paged terminal. Identification or index;
  • the receiving unit 731 is configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, the receiving station The uplink signal sent by the terminal.
  • the first configuration information when the first configuration information is used to configure the truncated identifier of the terminal, the first configuration information includes at least one of: a data bit number of the truncated identifier of the terminal, the The truncation of the terminal identifies the location in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
  • the first configuration information is configured by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control element.
  • the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 740 and a network device 750.
  • the terminal 740 may include: a receiving unit 741, and a sending unit 742, where
  • the sending unit 742 is configured to send, to the network device, a second message, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information.
  • the receiving unit 741 is configured to receive a first message sent by the network device, where the first message is sent by the network device after determining, according to the second message, the group that the terminal is located, where the first message is used by the network device. Instructing the group in which the terminal is located whether a terminal is paged;
  • the sending unit 742 is further configured to send an uplink signal to the network device if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
  • the network device 750 may include: a receiving unit 751, a determining unit 752, and a sending unit 753, where
  • the receiving unit 751 is configured to receive a second message that is sent by the terminal, where the second message includes data bits that are used by the terminal to calculate packet information.
  • a determining unit 752 configured to determine, according to the second message, a group in which the terminal is located;
  • the sending unit 753 is configured to send, to the terminal, a first message, where the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged;
  • the receiving unit 751 is further configured to: if the terminal in which the terminal is located, the terminal is paged, and receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal;
  • the sending unit 753 is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
  • the sending timing of the second message is: when the terminal initiates the attach request.
  • the second message may be sent by at least one of system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
  • the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 760 and a network device 770.
  • the terminal 760 may include: a receiving unit 761, and a sending unit 762, where
  • the sending unit 762 is configured to send, to the network device, a second message, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal;
  • the receiving unit 761 is configured to receive a paging message sent by the network device, where the paging message is sent after the network device determines the truncation identifier or index of the terminal according to the second message, where the paging message is sent by the network device.
  • the message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal;
  • the sending unit 762 is further configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, The network device sends an uplink signal.
  • the network device 770 may include: a receiving unit 771, a determining unit 772, and a sending unit 773, where
  • the receiving unit 771 is configured to receive a second message sent by the terminal, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal;
  • a determining unit 772 configured to determine, according to the second message, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal;
  • a sending unit 773 configured to send a paging message to the terminal, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal;
  • the receiving unit 771 is further configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, The uplink signal sent by the terminal.
  • the sending timing of the second message is: when the terminal initiates the attach request.
  • the second message may be sent by at least one of system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
  • each functional unit included in the terminal may refer to the foregoing various embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • the various functional units included in the network device reference may be made to the foregoing various embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • the network device can dynamically configure the number of data bits of the first message according to actual conditions.
  • the time-frequency resource overhead of the beam scanning when the network device sends the paging message can be reduced.
  • each network element such as a base station or a terminal device
  • each network element includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function in order to implement the above functions.
  • the present application can be implemented in a combination of hardware or hardware and computer software in conjunction with the methods or steps of the various examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is implemented in hardware or computer software to drive hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application may divide a function module into a base station or a terminal device according to the foregoing method example.
  • each function module may be divided according to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the module in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and the actual implementation may have another division manner. The following is an example of dividing each functional module by using corresponding functions.
  • Figure 9 illustrates a terminal 200 provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • the terminal 200 may include: one or more terminal processors 201, a memory 202, a communication interface 203, a receiver 205, a transmitter 206, a coupler 207, an antenna 208, a user interface 202, and an input and output module. (including audio input and output module 210, key input module 211, display 212, etc.). These components can be connected by bus 204 or other means, and FIG. 9 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
  • Communication interface 203 can be used by terminal 200 to communicate with other communication devices, such as network devices.
  • the network device may be the network device 300 shown in FIG.
  • the communication interface 203 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G Fifth Generation
  • the terminal 200 may be configured with a wired communication interface 203, such as a Local Access Network (LAN) interface.
  • LAN Local Access Network
  • Transmitter 206 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by terminal processor 201.
  • Receiver 205 can be used to perform reception processing, such as signal demodulation, on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 208.
  • transmitter 206 and receiver 205 can be viewed as a wireless modem.
  • the number of the transmitter 206 and the receiver 205 may each be one or more.
  • the antenna 208 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • the coupler 207 is configured to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 208 into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 205.
  • the terminal 200 may further include other communication components such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth module, a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to the above-described wireless communication signals, the terminal 200 can also support other wireless communication signals such as satellite signals, short-wave signals, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, the terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
  • a wired network interface such as a LAN interface
  • the input and output module can be used to implement interaction between the terminal 200 and the user/external environment, and can mainly include an audio input and output module 210, a key input module 211, a display 212, and the like. Specifically, the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like. The input and output modules communicate with the terminal processor 201 through the user interface 209.
  • Memory 202 is coupled to terminal processor 201 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • memory 202 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.
  • the memory 202 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX.
  • the memory 202 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
  • the memory 202 can also store an interface program, which can realistically display the content of the application through a graphical operation interface, and receive user control operations on the application through input controls such as menus, dialog boxes, and buttons.
  • the memory 202 can be used to store an implementation of the communication method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side.
  • Terminal processor 201 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal processor 201 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 212, such as the method provided by the method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
  • the terminal 200 can be the terminal 103 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, and a user agent. , mobile client and more.
  • the terminal processor 201 is generally a control center of a terminal device, and may be generally referred to as a processing unit for controlling the terminal device to perform the above-described FIG. 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, FIG. 7A-7G, and FIG. 8A-8D.
  • the receiver 205 can perform the DCI sent by the network device in the terminal device in FIG. 2, and the terminal processor 201 can perform the implementation of determining the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block in FIG.
  • the receiver 205 can perform the DCI sent by the network device in the terminal device in FIG. 2
  • the terminal processor 201 can perform the implementation of determining the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block in FIG.
  • the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 9 is only one implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In an actual application, the terminal 200 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
  • network device 300 can include one or more network device processors 301, memory 302, communication interface 303, transmitter 305, receiver 306, coupler 307, and antenna 308. These components can be connected by bus 304 or other means, and FIG. 10 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
  • Communication interface 303 can be used by network device 300 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices or other network devices.
  • the terminal device may be the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 9.
  • the communication interface 303 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the network device 300 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 303 to support wired communication.
  • the backhaul link between one network device 300 and other network devices 300 may be a wired communication connection.
  • Transmitter 305 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by network device processor 301.
  • Receiver 306 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 308. For example, signal demodulation.
  • transmitter 305 and receiver 306 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the network device 300, the number of the transmitter 305 and the receiver 306 may each be one or more.
  • the antenna 308 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • Coupler 307 can be used to divide the mobile pass signal into multiple channels and distribute it to multiple receivers 306.
  • Memory 302 is coupled to network device processor 301 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • memory 302 may include high speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.
  • the memory 302 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as uCOS, VxWorks, or RTLinux.
  • the memory 302 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
  • the network device processor 301 can be used to perform wireless channel management, implement call and communication link establishment and teardown, and provide cell handover control and the like for terminals in the control area.
  • the network device processor 301 may include: an Administration Module/Communication Module (AM/CM) (a center for voice exchange and information exchange), and a Basic Module (BM) (for Complete call processing, signaling processing, radio resource management, radio link management and circuit maintenance functions), code conversion and sub-multiplexer (TCSM) (for multiplexing demultiplexing and code conversion functions) )and many more.
  • AM/CM Administration Module/Communication Module
  • BM Basic Module
  • TCSM code conversion and sub-multiplexer
  • the network device processor 301 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the network device processor 301 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 302, such as the method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, on the network device 300 side, and execute the instructions contained in the program.
  • the network device 300 can be the network device 101 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a base transceiver station, a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (ESS). , NodeB, eNodeB, access point or TRP, etc.
  • the network device processor 301 is typically a control center of a base station, and may be generally referred to as a processing unit for controlling the base station to perform the above-described Figures 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 7A-7G, and 8A-8D.
  • the steps performed by the network device or base station can perform the steps of network device configuration DCI in FIG. 2, and transmitter 305 can perform the steps of implementing the DCI by PDCCH in FIG.
  • network device configuration DCI in FIG. 2 can perform the steps of implementing the DCI by PDCCH in FIG.
  • the network device 300 shown in FIG. 10 is only one implementation of the embodiment of the present application. In actual applications, the network device 300 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, or an electrical, mechanical or other form of connection.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the embodiments of the present invention.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present invention contributes in essence or to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium.
  • a number of instructions are included to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .

Abstract

Provided are a communication method and a communication device. The method comprises: receiving downlink control information (DCI) sent by a network device through a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), wherein the DCI comprises information of a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) time-frequency resource block, the DCI schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides paging information of at least one terminal device, N being a positive integer greater than or equal to 1; determining, according to the DCI, a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated, wherein the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated is part of time-frequency resource blocks in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; and demodulating the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated. Since part of the time-frequency resource blocks are demodulated, the power consumption overhead of the terminal device due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced, compared to demodulating all PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.

Description

通信方法和通信设备Communication method and communication device 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种无线通信系统中通信的方法和通信设备。The present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a communication device for communication in a wireless communication system.
背景技术Background technique
移动业务的发展对无线通信的数据速率和效率要求越来越高。在未来无线通信系统中,波束成型技术用来将传输信号的能量限制在某个波束方向内,从而增加信号和接收的效率。波束成型技术能够有效扩大无线信号的传输范围,降低信号干扰,从而达到更高的通信效率和获取更高的网络容量。然而,在采用波束成型技术的通信网络中,首先需要将发送波束和接收波束匹配,使得发送端到接收端的增益最大,否则无法获取比较高的通信效率。而且,为了达到全覆盖,要求基站端波束进行扫描。波束扫描将带来很多问题,其中之一就是广播信息传输的开销增大,尤其是寻呼信息。The development of mobile services is increasingly demanding data rates and efficiencies for wireless communications. In future wireless communication systems, beamforming techniques are used to limit the energy of the transmitted signal to a certain beam direction, thereby increasing signal and reception efficiency. Beamforming technology can effectively expand the transmission range of wireless signals and reduce signal interference, thereby achieving higher communication efficiency and higher network capacity. However, in a communication network using beamforming technology, it is first necessary to match the transmit beam and the receive beam so that the gain from the sender to the receiver is maximized, otherwise a relatively high communication efficiency cannot be obtained. Moreover, in order to achieve full coverage, the base station end beam is required to be scanned. Beam scanning will bring many problems, one of which is the increased overhead of broadcast information transmission, especially paging information.
为降低寻呼信息的开销,往往会增大每次寻呼时终端设备标识数目。然而终端设备标识数目的增加,将会导致终端设备功耗的开销。To reduce the overhead of paging information, the number of terminal device identifications per paging is often increased. However, an increase in the number of terminal device identifications will result in an overhead of power consumption of the terminal device.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法、设备和相关产品,以减少终端设备在寻呼过程中的功耗开销。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and related products, so as to reduce power consumption of a terminal device during a paging process.
一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,所述方法包括:In one aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, where the method includes:
接收网络设备发送的下行控制信息DCI,所述DCI中包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH时频资源块的信息,所述DCI调度N个PDSCH时频资源块,每个PDSCH时频资源块提供至少一个终端设备的寻呼信息,所述N为大于等于1的正整数;Receiving downlink control information DCI sent by the network device, where the DCI includes information of a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the DCI schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides at least one terminal Paging information of the device, where N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
根据所述DCI确定需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块,所述需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块是所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的部分时频资源块;Determining, according to the DCI, a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated, where the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated is a partial time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks;
解调所述需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块。Demodulating the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated.
上述方法中,所述需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块是所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的部分时频资源块。相对于解调所述DCI中包括的PDSCH时频资源块,减少了终端设备因解调PDSCH时频资源块带来的功耗开销。In the above method, the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated is a partial time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks. Compared with demodulating the PDSCH time-frequency resource block included in the DCI, the power consumption overhead of the terminal equipment due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced.
在一种可能的实现方式中,In a possible implementation,
所述N的取值通过下述方式中的一种获取:The value of the N is obtained by one of the following methods:
接收所述网络设备通过DCI指示的所述N的取值;Receiving, by the network device, a value of the N indicated by the DCI;
接收所述网络设备通过网络配置信息指示的所述N的取值;或,Receiving, by the network device, the value of the N indicated by the network configuration information; or
根据预先配置的N的取值作为所述N的取值。The value of N is used as the value of the N according to the value of the pre-configured N.
可选的,所述网络配置信息包括下述信息中的至少其中一个:系统信息、媒体接入层控制的控制元素(Media Access Control–control element,MAC-CE)、无线资源控制(Radio resource control,RRC)信令、剩余最小系统信息(Remaining minimum system information,RMSI)或系统信息块(system information block,SIB)。Optionally, the network configuration information includes at least one of the following: system information, a media access control-control element (MAC-CE), and a radio resource control (Radio resource control). , RRC) signaling, Remaining minimum system information (RMSI) or system information block (SIB).
可选的,所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息包括但不限于:所述PDSCH时频资源块的子载波位置、符号位置、解调方法等。Optionally, the information about the PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的时频资源大小相同;和/或,所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略MCS相同。In a possible implementation, the time-frequency resource size of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is the same; and/or each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks The modulation and coding strategy MCS of the PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are the same.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的大小不同;所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略MCS相同。每个PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略MCS相同,可以降低因指示MSC造成的PDCCH资源的开销。In a possible implementation manner, a size of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is different; and each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is a time-frequency resource block. The modulation and coding strategy MCS is the same. The modulation and coding strategy MCS of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the same, and the overhead of PDCCH resources caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息还包括所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的大小和/或位置。In a possible implementation, the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block further includes a size and/or a location of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述DCI中还包括所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块寻呼的终端设备的个数;或,In a possible implementation manner, the DCI further includes a number of terminal devices that are paged by each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
所述DCI中还包括所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块携带的终端设备标识的数目。The DCI further includes the number of terminal device identifiers carried in each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述根据所述DCI确定需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块包括:In a possible implementation, the determining, by the DCI, a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated includes:
根据自身标识的全部或部分数据比特对N取余,获取与自身标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块的编号或位置。Allocating all or part of the data bits of the self to the N, and obtaining the number or location of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the PDSCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,In a possible implementation, the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。The information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述N个PDSCH时频资源块,是通过预先配置或所述网络设备指示的方式限制物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)的数目或带宽大小后的PDSCH时频资源块。在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, where the number of physical resource blocks (PRBs) is restricted by a pre-configuration or a manner indicated by the network device. Or the PDSCH time-frequency resource block after the bandwidth size. In a possible implementation manner, when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块分组后的信息;或,The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates information after the N pieces of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are grouped; or
所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的大小。The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates the size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:In a possible implementation manner, when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
通过一个物理下行控制信道PDCCH接收一个DCI,所述一个DCI中包括N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,Receiving, by using one physical downlink control channel PDCCH, a DCI, where the one DCI includes information of N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
通过N个PDCCH接收N个DCI,所述N个DCI中每个DCI中包括一个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。The N DCIs are received by the N PDCCHs, and each of the N DCIs includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
在一种可能的实现方式中,In a possible implementation,
所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的分组索引信息、资源块大小和MCS;或,The DCI further includes packet index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier; or
所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的寻呼接入时机(Paging occasion,PO)索引信息、资源块大小和MCS。The DCI also includes paging access timing (Paging occasion, PO) index information, resource block size, and MCS of the terminal device identifier.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes:
接收所述网络设备发送的配置信息,Receiving configuration information sent by the network device,
所述配置信息包括Y组信息,每组信息包括寻呼的X个终端设备的信息或X个终端设备的标识;所述X和Y为大于等于1的正整数;The configuration information includes Y group information, and each group of information includes information of X terminal devices of the paging or identifiers of X terminal devices; the X and Y are positive integers greater than or equal to 1;
所述方法还包括:The method further includes:
根据所述X和Y的值确定需要接收的PO。The PO that needs to be received is determined based on the values of X and Y.
另一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,所述方法包括:On the other hand, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, where the method includes:
确定需要发送的下行控制信息DCI,所述DCI中包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH时频资源块的信息,所述DCI调度N个PDSCH时频资源块,每个PDSCH时频资源块提供至少一个终端设备的寻呼信息,所述N为大于等于1的正整数;Determining downlink control information DCI to be transmitted, where the DCI includes information of a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the DCI schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides at least one terminal device Paging information, the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
通过物理下行控制信道PDCCH发送所述DCI。The DCI is transmitted through a physical downlink control channel PDCCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes:
通过所述DCI指示所述N的取值;The value of the N is indicated by the DCI;
通过网络配置信息指示所述N的取值;或,The value of the N is indicated by the network configuration information; or
根据预先配置确定所述N的值。The value of the N is determined according to a pre-configuration.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的时频资源大小相同;所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略MCS相同。In a possible implementation manner, a time-frequency resource of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks has the same time-frequency resource size; and each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks has a time-frequency The modulation and coding strategy of the resource block is the same as the MCS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的大小不同;和/或,所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略MCS相同。In a possible implementation, the size of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is different; and/or, each PDSCH in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks The modulation and coding strategy MCS of the frequency resource block is the same.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息还包括所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的大小和/或位置。In a possible implementation, the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block further includes a size and/or a location of each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述DCI中还包括所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块寻呼的终端设备的个数;或,In a possible implementation manner, the DCI further includes a number of terminal devices that are paged by each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
所述DCI中还包括所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块携带的终端设备标识的数目。The DCI further includes the number of terminal device identifiers carried in each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:通过预先配置或指示的方式,限制所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的物理资源块PRB的数目或带宽大小。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: limiting, by a pre-configured or indicated manner, a number of physical resource blocks PRB or a bandwidth size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。In a possible implementation, the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the N PDSCH time-frequency Information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the resource block.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:In a possible implementation manner, when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块分组后的信息;或,The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates information after the N pieces of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are grouped; or
所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的大小。The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates the size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:In a possible implementation manner, when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
通过一个PDCCH接收一个DCI,所述一个DCI中包括N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,Receiving, by using one PDCCH, one DCI, where the one DCI includes information of N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
通过N个PDCCH接收N个DCI,所述N个DCI中每个DCI中包括一个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。The N DCIs are received by the N PDCCHs, and each of the N DCIs includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的分组索引信息、资源块大 小和MCS;或,所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的PO索引信息、资源块大小和MCS。In a possible implementation manner, the DCI further includes packet index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier; or the DCI further includes a PO index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier. .
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes:
发送配置信息,所述配置信息包括Y组信息,每组信息包括寻呼的X个终端设备或X个终端设备的标识;所述X和Y为大于等于1的正整数;所述方法还包括:根据所述X和Y的值确定需要接收的寻呼接入时机PO。Sending configuration information, where the configuration information includes Y group information, each group of information includes an identifier of the X terminal devices or X terminal devices that are paged; the X and Y are positive integers greater than or equal to 1; : determining the paging access opportunity PO that needs to be received according to the values of X and Y.
再一方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信方法,包括:In a further aspect, the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication method, including:
向终端设备发送寻呼消息的配置信息;所述配置信息包括寻呼消息的一个控制资源块的信息,所述一个控制资源块由N个寻呼接入时机(Paging occasion,PO)对应的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成;所述N为大于等于1的正整数;And sending, to the terminal device, configuration information of the paging message, where the configuration information includes information of a control resource block of the paging message, where the one control resource block is searched by N paging access occasions (PO) The time-frequency resource composition of the control resource of the call message; the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
基于所述配置信息向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息的控制资源。And transmitting, to the terminal device, a control resource of the paging message based on the configuration information.
上述方法中,一个控制资源块由N个PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成,对于多个PO的寻呼消息能够通过一个控制资源块来调度,能够降低关于PO的配置信息的开销。In the above method, one control resource block is composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of paging messages corresponding to N POs, and paging messages for multiple POs can be scheduled by one control resource block, which can reduce configuration information about POs. s expenses.
可选的,所述控制资源包括但不限于:PO对应的寻呼消息的物理下行控制信道PDCCH,PO对应的寻呼消息的下行控制信息DCI或PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源集合CORESET。Optionally, the control resource includes, but is not limited to, a physical downlink control channel PDCCH of a paging message corresponding to the PO, a downlink control information DCI of the paging message corresponding to the PO, or a control resource set CORESET of the paging message corresponding to the PO.
可选的,所述N也可以为大于等于2的正整数。Optionally, the N may also be a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
可选的,所述一个控制资源块可以由一个PO持续时间内多个寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成。Optionally, the one control resource block may be composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of multiple paging messages in a PO duration.
可选的,所述的PO的持续时间是一个PO内的时隙(slot)数目、子帧数目或者小时隙(mini-slot)数目。所述PO的持续时间可以通过SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目隐含指示。Optionally, the duration of the PO is a number of slots in a PO, a number of subframes, or a number of mini-slots. The duration of the PO may be implicitly indicated by the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
所述PO的持续时间与所述SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目相关。例如,所述PO的持续时间可以是所述SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目的整数倍或者分数倍。The duration of the PO is related to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs. For example, the duration of the PO may be an integer multiple or a fractional multiple of the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
可选的,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the method further includes:
根据所述SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目获取所述PO的持续时间。The duration of the PO is obtained according to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
可选的,可以将多个PO的寻呼消息分为一组。一个组内的寻呼消息的控制资源采用一个控制资源块进行传输。每组内不同的PO的寻呼消息的控制信息可以使用相同的DCI格式,也可以使用不同的DCI格式。对于使用不同DCI格式的寻呼消息,可以具有相同的比特数目。不同组内的寻呼消息数目可以是相等的,也可以是不相同的。Optionally, paging messages of multiple POs may be grouped into one group. The control resources of the paging messages within a group are transmitted using one control resource block. The control information of the paging messages of different POs in each group may use the same DCI format, or different DCI formats may be used. For paging messages using different DCI formats, there may be the same number of bits. The number of paging messages in different groups may be equal or different.
可选的,所述用于配置的寻呼消息的信息包括但不限于:剩余最小系统信息(remaining minimum system information,RMSI),物理广播信道(Physical Broadcast channel,PBCH),DCI,无线资源控制(Radio resource control,RRC)或媒体接入控制-控制元素(Medium Access control-control element,MAC-CE)。Optionally, the information about the configured paging message includes, but is not limited to, remaining minimum system information (RMSI), physical broadcast channel (PBCH), DCI, and radio resource control ( Radio resource control (RRC) or Medium Access Control-control element (MAC-CE).
可选的,多个PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源可以位于一个公共搜索空间中,也可以在一个控制资源集合当中。Optionally, the control resources of the paging messages corresponding to the multiple POs may be located in a common search space or in a control resource set.
可选的,一个PO持续时间内多个寻呼消息的的控制资源(例如一个PO持续时间内多个寻呼消息的PDCCH)可以准同步(Quasi-Co-located,QCL)或关联到一个同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SS block)上,或者QCL或者关联到一个特定的参考信号上。一个PO持续时间内多个寻呼消息的控制资源(例如多个PO对应的寻呼消息的PDCCH)也可以QCL或者关联到不同的SS block上,或者QCL或者关联到不同的特定参考信号上。Optionally, a control resource of multiple paging messages in a PO duration (eg, a PDCCH of multiple paging messages in a PO duration) may be quasi-co-located (QCL) or associated with a synchronization. On the signal block (SS block), or QCL or associated to a specific reference signal. The control resources of multiple paging messages (eg, PDCCHs of paging messages corresponding to multiple POs) for one PO duration may also be QCL or associated to different SS blocks, or QCL or associated to different specific reference signals.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述时频资源块被划分为K等份,所述K为大于等于1的正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the time-frequency resource block is divided into K equal parts, and the K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1.
可选的,所述K的值可以与寻呼消息的数目相同。所述K的值也可以小于寻呼消息的数目,这样每一等份的时频资源可以包括多个寻呼消息的控制资源。Optionally, the value of the K may be the same as the number of paging messages. The value of K may also be less than the number of paging messages, such that each aliquot of time-frequency resources may include control resources for multiple paging messages.
可选的,所述K的值可以由网络设备(例如基站)预先配置,也可以由终端设备和网络设备预先约定。所述时频资源份数(即所述K的值)还可以根据公共搜索空间资源大小或者配置的资源大小隐含指示。Optionally, the value of the K may be pre-configured by a network device (for example, a base station), or may be pre-agreed by the terminal device and the network device. The number of time-frequency resource shares (ie, the value of the K) may also be implicitly indicated according to the size of the common search space resource or the configured resource size.
可选的,所述K等份的时频资源块可以按照时间顺序优先,也可以按照频率顺序优先的方式进行放置或分布。所述K等份的时频资源块也可以是顺序的也可以是倒序的,可以是终端和网络设备预先约定的,也可以是协议预先规定的。Optionally, the time-frequency resource blocks of the K equal parts may be prioritized in time order, or may be placed or distributed in a frequency sequential priority manner. The time-frequency resource blocks of the K equal parts may also be sequential or reversed, and may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device, or may be pre-defined by the protocol.
另一方面,本申请实施例提供了另一种通信方法,包括:On the other hand, the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, including:
接收网络设备发送的寻呼消息的配置信息;所述配置信息包括寻呼消息的一个控制资源块的时频位置信息,所述一个控制资源块由N个寻呼接入时机PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成;所述N为大于等于1的正整数;Receiving configuration information of a paging message sent by the network device; the configuration information includes time-frequency location information of a control resource block of the paging message, and the paging bit corresponding to the N paging access occasions PO of the one control resource block The time-frequency resource composition of the control resource of the message; the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
接收所述网络设备发送的寻呼消息的控制资源。Receiving a control resource of a paging message sent by the network device.
上述方法中,一个控制资源块由N个PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成,对于多个PO的寻呼消息能够通过一个控制资源块来调度,能够降低关于PO的配置信息的开销。In the above method, one control resource block is composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of paging messages corresponding to N POs, and paging messages for multiple POs can be scheduled by one control resource block, which can reduce configuration information about POs. s expenses.
可选的,所述控制资源包括但不限于:PO对应的寻呼消息的PDCCH,PO对应的寻呼消息的DCI或PO对应的寻呼消息的CORESET。Optionally, the control resource includes, but is not limited to, a PDCCH of a paging message corresponding to the PO, a DCI of the paging message corresponding to the PO, or a CORESET of the paging message corresponding to the PO.
可选的,所述N也可以为大于等于2的正整数。Optionally, the N may also be a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
可选的,所述一个控制资源块可以由一个PO持续时间内多个寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成。Optionally, the one control resource block may be composed of time-frequency resources of control resources of multiple paging messages in a PO duration.
可选的,所述的PO的持续时间是一个PO内的时隙(slot)数目、子帧数目或者小时隙(mini-slot)数目。所述PO的持续时间可以通过SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目隐含指示。Optionally, the duration of the PO is a number of slots in a PO, a number of subframes, or a number of mini-slots. The duration of the PO may be implicitly indicated by the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
所述PO的持续时间与所述SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目相关。例如,所述PO的持续时间可以是所述SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目的整数倍或者分数倍。The duration of the PO is related to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs. For example, the duration of the PO may be an integer multiple or a fractional multiple of the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
可选的,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the method further includes:
根据所述SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目获取所述PO的持续时间。The duration of the PO is obtained according to the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备根据所述配置信息的周期确定发送给所述终端设备的PO的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源的位置。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device determines, according to a period of the configuration information, a location of a time-frequency resource of a control resource of a paging message sent by the PO of the terminal device.
本申请实施例还提供了一种信号传输方法、相关装置及系统,可以动态配置寻呼指示的数据比特数目,降低寻呼消息传输过程中波束扫描的资源开销。在本申请实施例中,寻呼指示可称为第一消息。The embodiment of the present application further provides a signal transmission method, a related device, and a system, which can dynamically configure the number of data bits of a paging indication, and reduce the resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission. In the embodiment of the present application, the paging indication may be referred to as a first message.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:终端接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;所述终端根据所述第一配置信息确定所述终端所在的组;若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,则所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In a first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a terminal, first configuration information and a first message sent by a network device; the first configuration information being used by the terminal to determine the a group in which the terminal is located, the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; the terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, a group in which the terminal is located; If the group has a terminal that is paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号;所述网络设备根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: the network device sends the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal; the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine the terminal. In the group, the first message is used to indicate whether the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; if the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged, the network device receives an uplink signal sent by the terminal. The network device sends a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
结合第一方面和/或第二方面,在可选实施例中,所述第一配置信息可包括以下至少一项:所述第一消息的数据比特数目、所述第一消息关联的组的数目、所述第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、所述用于计算分组信息的数据比特在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。With reference to the first aspect and/or the second aspect, in an optional embodiment, the first configuration information may include at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a group of the first message associated with a number, a number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, a number of data bits used to calculate packet information, a location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, a paging occasion The number, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of sync blocks.
实施第一方面和/或第二方面,在可选实施例中,第一配置信息可根据实际情况灵活配置第一消息的大小,即第一消息的数据比特数目。一种可能的方式是,当终端的数目越多时,配置的所述第一消息的数据比特数目越多,或者,所述第一消息关联的组的数目越多。另一种可能的方式是,当被寻呼的终端越多时,配置的所述第一消息的数据比特数目越多,或者,所述第一消息关联的组的数目越多。此外,可以降低网络设备扫描的波束数量,以降低寻呼消息传输过程中波束扫描的时频资源开销。The first aspect and/or the second aspect are implemented. In an optional embodiment, the first configuration information may flexibly configure the size of the first message, that is, the number of data bits of the first message, according to actual conditions. One possible way is that the more the number of terminals, the more the number of data bits of the first message configured, or the more the number of groups associated with the first message. Another possible way is that the more data terminals are configured, the more data bits are configured for the first message, or the more the number of groups associated with the first message. In addition, the number of beams scanned by the network device can be reduced to reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission.
结合第一方面和/或第二方面,可选的,本申请中可对一个跟踪区域或者网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,或者对一个寻呼时机对应的多个终端进行分组。分组的组数目即所述第一消息关联的组的数目。分组方式可以由网络设备和终端预先约定,也可以由标准协议预先定义。In combination with the first aspect and/or the second aspect, optionally, a tracking area or a plurality of terminals within the jurisdiction of the network device or a plurality of terminals corresponding to one paging occasion may be grouped in the present application. The number of groups of packets is the number of groups associated with the first message. The grouping mode can be pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal, or can be predefined by a standard protocol.
在本申请中,终端所在的组和终端标识、分组的数目、第一消息的数据比特数目、第一消息关联的组的数目、第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、所述用于计算分组信息的数据比特在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量中的至少一项相关。可理解的,上述至少一项信息中,部分或者全部可由标准协议预先定义,也可由网络设备和终端约定。In the present application, the group and terminal identifier in which the terminal is located, the number of packets, the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, used for calculation The number of data bits of the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks are related to at least one of . It can be understood that some or all of the above at least one piece of information may be pre-defined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
在可选实施例中,终端在接收到第一配置信息后,可以通过以下两种计算策略来计算终端所在的组。In an optional embodiment, after receiving the first configuration information, the terminal may calculate the group in which the terminal is located by using the following two computing policies.
第一种计算策略,通过公式
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000001
来计算终端所在的组。
The first calculation strategy, through the formula
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000001
To calculate the group in which the terminal is located.
其中,UEID为终端标识表示的数值。N可以根据寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量中的至少一项,例如,可以是DRX周期内包括的PO数目或者寻呼窗数目,还可以是同步信号块的数目等。n表示终端属于K组中的第n组。The UEID is a value represented by the terminal identifier. N may be according to at least one of the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks, for example, may be the number of POs or the number of paging windows included in the DRX cycle, or may be a synchronization signal block. The number and so on. n indicates that the terminal belongs to the nth group in the K group.
第二种计算策略,通过公式n=(用于计算分组信息的数据比特表示的数值)mod K来计算终端所在的组。The second calculation strategy calculates the group in which the terminal is located by the formula n=(the value used to calculate the data bit representation of the packet information) mod K.
其中,用于计算分组信息的数据比特为终端标识中的部分数据比特。用于计算分组信息的数据比特通过以下两个因素选取:用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置,用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目。Wherein, the data bits used to calculate the group information are part of the data bits in the terminal identifier. The data bits used to calculate the packet information are selected by two factors: the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, and the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information.
可选的,可通过以下方式确定上述两个因素:第一个因素,即用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置,可以根据上述的常数N确定;第二个因素,即用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目,可以根据分组的组数目K确定。Optionally, the foregoing two factors may be determined by: the first factor, that is, the location of the data bit used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, which may be determined according to the constant N above; the second factor, that is, The number of data bits for calculating the packet information can be determined according to the number of groups K of the packets.
结合第一方面和/或第二方面,在可选实施例中,第一消息可用于指示终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。具体的,本申请中将多个终端分为多个组,一个组内的各个终端中若包括了被寻呼的终端,则表示该组有终端被寻呼。In conjunction with the first aspect and/or the second aspect, in an alternative embodiment, the first message can be used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal paged. Specifically, in the present application, a plurality of terminals are divided into a plurality of groups, and if each of the terminals in the group includes the paged terminal, it indicates that the group has the terminal being paged.
具体的,第一消息可通过各个比特位的取值指示各个组是否有终端被寻呼。Specifically, the first message may indicate, by using the value of each bit, whether each group has a terminal being paged.
可选的,第一消息指示的各个组可以是一个跟踪区范围内的多个终端进行分组得到的各个组,也可以是一个网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端进行分组得到的各个组,还可以是一个PO内的多个终端进行分组得到的各个组。Optionally, each group indicated by the first message may be each group obtained by grouping multiple terminals in a tracking area, or may be a group obtained by grouping multiple terminals in a network device jurisdiction, and It may be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals in one PO.
可选的,第一消息指示的各个组可以是将多个跟踪区范围内的包括的多个终端分别进行分组,得到的各个组;也可以是将多个网络设备管辖范围内包括的多个终端分别进行分组,得到的各个组;还可以是将多个寻呼时机内包括的多个终端分别进行分组,得到的各个组。Optionally, each group indicated by the first message may be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of tracking areas, or may be multiple included in a plurality of network device jurisdictions. Each of the obtained groups is grouped by the terminal, and may be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals included in the plurality of paging occasions.
在本申请中,终端可根据第一配置信息确定所在的组,根据第一消息确定所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。In the present application, the terminal may determine the group in which the group is located according to the first configuration information, and determine, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged.
结合第一方面和/或第二方面,在可选实施例中,网络设备可无需向网络设备发送第一配置信息,第一配置信息中配置的各项可由终端和网络设备之间约定,也可由标准协议预先定义。在这种情况下,终端和网络设备之间都可根据约定,或根据标准协议预先定义的信息确定终端所在的组。With reference to the first aspect and/or the second aspect, in an optional embodiment, the network device may not need to send the first configuration information to the network device, and the items configured in the first configuration information may be agreed between the terminal and the network device, It can be pre-defined by standard protocols. In this case, the terminal and the network device can determine the group in which the terminal is located according to the agreement or according to the information predefined by the standard protocol.
第三方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:终端接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;所述终端根据所述第一配置信息,确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In a third aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a terminal, first configuration information and a paging message sent by a network device; the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier of the terminal or An index; the paging message includes a truncation identifier or an index of the at least one paged terminal; the terminal determines a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal according to the first configuration information; and if the terminal has a truncated identifier and a location The truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal is the same, or the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same.
第四方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: the network device sends the first configuration information and the paging message to the terminal; the first configuration information is used to configure the truncated identifier or index of the terminal. The paging message includes a truncation identifier or index of at least one paged terminal; if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index and location of the terminal The index of the at least one paged terminal is the same, and the network device receives the uplink signal sent by the terminal.
实施第三方面和/或第四方面描述的方法,可以通过第一配置信息灵活配置各个终端的截断标识或索引,并且,通过截断标识或索引寻呼终端,寻呼消息的内容更少,可以降低寻呼消息传输过程中波束扫描的时频资源开销。Implementing the method described in the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect, the truncated identifier or index of each terminal may be flexibly configured by using the first configuration information, and the content of the paging message is less by the truncated identifier or the index paging terminal, Reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission.
实施第三方面和/或第四方面,在可选实施例中,所述第一配置信息可包括以下至少一项:Implementing the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect, in an optional embodiment, the first configuration information may include at least one of the following:
所述第一消息的数据比特数目、所述第一消息关联的组的数目、所述第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、所述用于计算分组信息的数据比特在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。a number of data bits of the first message, a number of groups associated with the first message, a number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, a number of data bits used to calculate packet information, and the The location of the data bits of the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
结合第三方面和/或第四方面,在可选实施例的,本申请中可通过第一配置信息配置多个终端的截断标识或索引,该多个终端可以是一个跟踪区域内的多个终端,也可以是网络 设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以是一个寻呼时机或寻呼窗对应的多个终端。With reference to the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect, in an optional embodiment, the truncation identifier or index of the multiple terminals may be configured by using the first configuration information, where the multiple terminals may be multiple in one tracking area. The terminal may also be a plurality of terminals within the jurisdiction of the network device, or may be a paging occasion or a plurality of terminals corresponding to the paging window.
本申请中,终端的截断标识为终端标识的部分数据比特。终端的截断标识可根据以下至少一项信息确定:截断标识的数据比特数目、截断标识在终端标识中的位置、终端的标识、寻呼时机的数量、同步信号块的数量或者非连续接收周期的长度。在本申请中,上述至少一项信息中的部分或者全部可以由标准协议预先定义,或者,由网络设备和终端预先约定。根据上述至少一项信息确定终端的截断标识的方式有多种,可以由标准协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备和终端约定。In the present application, the truncation identifier of the terminal is a partial data bit of the terminal identifier. The truncation identifier of the terminal may be determined according to at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the truncated identifier, the location of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier, the identifier of the terminal, the number of paging occasions, the number of synchronization signal blocks, or the discontinuous reception period. length. In the present application, part or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol or pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal. The manner of determining the truncated identifier of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be multiple, may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
在可选实施例中,终端在接收到第一配置信息后,可根据第一配置信息确定自身的截断标识。和上述的用于计算分组信息的数据比特类似,终端的截断标识可以通过以下两个因素选取:截断标识的数据比特数目,截断标识在终端标识中的位置。In an optional embodiment, after receiving the first configuration information, the terminal may determine its own truncation identifier according to the first configuration information. Similar to the above-mentioned data bits for calculating group information, the truncation identifier of the terminal can be selected by the following two factors: truncating the number of data bits of the identifier, and truncating the position of the identifier in the terminal identifier.
举例说明,可以根据以下方式确定上述两个因素:第一个因素,即截断标识的数据比特数目;第二个因素,即截断标识在终端标识中的位置,可以根据N确定,N为常数,N可通过寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量中的至少一项确定。For example, the above two factors may be determined according to the following factors: the first factor, that is, the number of data bits of the truncated identifier; and the second factor, that is, the position of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier, which may be determined according to N, where N is a constant. N may be determined by at least one of the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
例如,终端的完整标识通过二进制表示时,该终端的截断标识可占用M个比特位,且,该终端的截断标识和该终端标识的最低的log 2N个比特位相邻。其中,该终端标识的最低的log 2N个比特位可用于计算终端对应的寻呼时机。 For example, when the complete identifier of the terminal is represented by binary, the truncated identifier of the terminal may occupy M bits, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is adjacent to the lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier. The lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate a paging occasion corresponding to the terminal.
结合第三方面和/或第四方面,在可选实施例中,寻呼消息中可包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引。终端可根据第一配置信息确定自身的截断标识或索引,根据寻呼消息确定是否被寻呼。In conjunction with the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect, in an alternative embodiment, a truncation identifier or index of at least one paged terminal may be included in the paging message. The terminal may determine its own truncation identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and determine whether to be paged according to the paging message.
在可选实施例中,若终端的截断标识和至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或,若终端的索引和至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,终端认为自身被寻呼,向网络设备发送上行信号。In an optional embodiment, if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, the terminal considers that the terminal is paged. The network device sends an uplink signal.
在另一可选实施例中,即使终端的截断标识和至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或,终端的索引和至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,终端也不一定被寻呼。这种情况下,终端需要结合网络设备发送的确认消息确定自身是否被寻呼,确认消息中可携带至少一个被寻呼终端的完整标识。In another optional embodiment, the terminal is not necessarily paged even if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the index of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal. . In this case, the terminal needs to determine whether it is paged in conjunction with the acknowledgment message sent by the network device, and the acknowledgment message may carry the complete identifier of at least one paged terminal.
结合第三方面和/或第四方面,在可选实施例中,网络设备可无需向网络设备发送第一配置信息,各个终端的截断标识可以由终端和网络设备进行约定,也可由标准协议预先定义。在这种情况下,终端和网络设备都可根据约定,或根据标准协议预先定义的信息确定自身的截断标识或索引。With reference to the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect, in an optional embodiment, the network device may not need to send the first configuration information to the network device, and the truncation identifier of each terminal may be agreed by the terminal and the network device, or may be pre-proposed by a standard protocol. definition. In this case, both the terminal and the network device can determine their own truncated identification or index according to the convention or according to pre-defined information of the standard protocol.
结合第一方面、第二方面、第三方面和第四方面,可选的,第一配置信息可通过以下至少一项配置:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。可选的,第一消息可通过物理下行共享信道或者物理下行控制信道发送。With reference to the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the fourth aspect, optionally, the first configuration information may be configured by at least one of the following: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, and downlink. Control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control elements. Optionally, the first message may be sent by using a physical downlink shared channel or a physical downlink control channel.
第五方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:终端向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的第一消息,所述第一消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组后发送的,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: the terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information; The terminal receives the first message sent by the network device, where the first message is sent by the network device according to the second message, and the first message is used to indicate the terminal. Whether the group in which the group is located is paged; if the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
第六方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:网络设备接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组;所述网络设备向所述终端发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号;所述网络设备根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a network device, a second message sent by a terminal, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information; Determining, by the network device, the group in which the terminal is located according to the second message; the network device sending a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged If the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the network device receives an uplink signal sent by the terminal; and the network device sends a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
实施第五方面和/或第六方面描述的方法,可以降低网络设备扫描的波束数量,以降低寻呼消息传输过程中波束扫描的时频资源开销。By implementing the method described in the fifth aspect and/or the sixth aspect, the number of beams scanned by the network device can be reduced to reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning during paging message transmission.
在第五方面和/或第六方面中,终端的分组方式可参照第一方面或第二方面的相关描述,网络设备确定终端所在的组的方式也可参照第一方面或第二方面的相关描述,在此不赘述。In the fifth aspect and/or the sixth aspect, the manner of grouping the terminal may refer to the related description of the first aspect or the second aspect, and the manner in which the network device determines the group in which the terminal is located may also refer to the related aspect of the first aspect or the second aspect. Description, not repeated here.
第七方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:终端向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引后发送的,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: a terminal sending a second message to a network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or index of the terminal; and the terminal receives the network a paging message sent by the device, where the paging message is sent after the network device determines the truncation identifier or index of the terminal according to the second message, where the paging message includes truncation of at least one paged terminal An identifier or an index; if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the terminal is The network device sends an uplink signal.
第八方面,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,该方法可包括:网络设备接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述网络设备向所述终端发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a signal transmission method, where the method may include: receiving, by a network device, a second message sent by a terminal, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal; Determining, by the second message, a truncation identifier or index of the terminal; the network device sending a paging message to the terminal, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal; The truncation identifier is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the network device receives the uplink signal sent by the terminal if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same.
实施第七方面和/或第八方面描述的方法,可以通过截断标识或索引寻呼终端,寻呼消息的内容更少,可以降低寻呼消息传输过程中波束扫描的时频资源开销。By implementing the method described in the seventh aspect and/or the eighth aspect, the content of the paging message can be reduced by truncating the identifier or the index paging terminal, and the time-frequency resource overhead of the beam scanning during the paging message transmission can be reduced.
第七方面和/或第八方面中,终端的截断标识可参照第三方面或第四方面的相关描述,在此不赘述。In the seventh aspect and/or the eighth aspect, the truncation identifier of the terminal may refer to the related description of the third aspect or the fourth aspect, and details are not described herein.
第九方面,本申请提供了一种终端,该终端可包括多个功能模块,用于执行第一方面或第一方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该终端可包括:接收单元,确定单元,发送单元。其中,所述接收单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;所述确定单元,用于根据所述第一配置信息确定所述终端所在的组;所述发送单元,用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by the first aspect or any one of the possible embodiments of the first aspect. The terminal may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit. The receiving unit is configured to receive first configuration information and a first message sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate Whether the group in which the terminal is located is paged; the determining unit is configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a group in which the terminal is located; and the sending unit is configured to: if the group in which the terminal is located The terminal is paged to send an uplink signal to the network device.
第十方面,本申请提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备可包括多个功能模块,用于执行第二方面或第二方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该网络设备可包括:接收单元,发送单元。其中,所述发送单元,用于向终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;所述接收单元,用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,接收所述 终端发送的上行信号;所述发送单元,还用于根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a network device, which may include multiple functional modules for performing the method provided by the second aspect or any one of the possible embodiments of the second aspect. The network device may include: a receiving unit, and a sending unit. The sending unit is configured to send the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate the Whether the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; the receiving unit is configured to receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal if the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; the sending unit is further configured to perform The uplink signal sends a paging message to the terminal.
结合第九方面和/或第十方面,在可选实施例中,所述第一配置信息包括以下至少一项:所述第一消息的数据比特数目、所述第一消息关联的组的数目、所述第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、所述用于计算分组信息的数据比特在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。With reference to the ninth aspect and/or the tenth aspect, in an optional embodiment, the first configuration information includes at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a number of groups associated with the first message And indicating, in the first message, a number of data bits of each group, a number of data bits used to calculate the group information, a location of the data bits used to calculate the group information in the terminal identifier, and a number of paging occasions. The length of the discontinuous reception period or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
结合第九方面和/或第十方面,在可选实施例中,终端所在的组n为:
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000002
其中,UEID为所述终端的标识,K为所述第一消息关联的组的数目,N为常数,N通过所述寻呼时机的数量、所述非连续接收周期的长度或者所述同步信号块的数量中的至少一项确定。
In conjunction with the ninth aspect and/or the tenth aspect, in an alternative embodiment, the group n in which the terminal is located is:
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000002
The UEID is an identifier of the terminal, K is a number of groups associated with the first message, and N is a constant, and N passes the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the synchronization signal. At least one of the number of blocks is determined.
第十一方面,本申请提供了一种终端,该终端可包括多个功能模块,用于相应的执行第三方面或第三方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该终端可包括:接收单元,确定单元,发送单元。其中,所述接收单元,用于接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;所述确定单元,用于根据所述第一配置信息,确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述发送单元,用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for respectively performing the method provided by the third aspect or any one of the possible embodiments of the third aspect. The terminal may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit. The receiving unit is configured to receive first configuration information and a paging message sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes at least one a truncating identifier or index of the paging terminal; the determining unit, configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal; the sending unit, if the truncation identifier and the location of the terminal The truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal is the same, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, an uplink signal is sent to the network device.
第十二方面,本申请提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备可包括多个功能模块,用于执行第四方面或第四方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该网络设备可包括:发送单元,接收单元。其中,所述发送单元,用于向终端发送第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;所述接收单元,用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,接收所述终端发送的上行信号。In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a network device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect. The network device may include: a sending unit, a receiving unit. The sending unit is configured to send first configuration information and a paging message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes at least one paged message. a truncating identifier or index of the terminal, where the receiving unit is configured to: if the truncated identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the at least one is found The index of the calling terminal is the same, and receives the uplink signal sent by the terminal.
结合第十一方面和/或第十二方面,在可选实施例中,当所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识时,所述第一配置信息包括以下至少一项:所述终端的截断标识的数据比特数目、所述终端的截断标识在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量;其中,所述终端的截断标识为所述终端标识的部分数据比特。With reference to the eleventh aspect and/or the twelfth aspect, in an optional embodiment, when the first configuration information is used to configure the truncation identifier of the terminal, the first configuration information includes at least one of the following: The number of data bits of the truncated identifier of the terminal, the location of the truncated identifier of the terminal in the terminal identifier, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks; wherein the terminal The truncation identifier is a partial data bit identified by the terminal.
结合第十一方面和/或第十二方面,在可选实施例中,所述终端的截断标识的位置和所述终端标识的最低log 2N个数据比特相邻;N为常数,N通过所述寻呼时机的数量、所述非连续接收周期的长度或者所述同步信号块的数量中的至少一项确定。 With reference to the eleventh aspect and/or the twelfth aspect, in an optional embodiment, the location of the truncation identifier of the terminal is adjacent to the lowest log 2 N data bits of the terminal identifier; N is a constant, and N passes At least one of the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks is determined.
结合第九方面、第十方面、第十一方面和第十二方面,在可选实施例中,所述第一配置信息通过以下至少一项配置:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。With reference to the ninth aspect, the tenth aspect, the eleventh aspect, and the twelfth aspect, in an optional embodiment, the first configuration information is configured by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information , other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information or media access control layer control elements.
第十三方面,本申请提供了一种终端,该终端可包括多个功能模块,用于相应的执行第五方面或第五方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该终端可包括:接收单元,发送单元。其中,所述发送单元,用于向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述 终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;所述接收单元,用于接收所述网络设备发送的第一消息,所述第一消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组后发送的,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;所述发送单元,还用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect. The terminal may include: a receiving unit, and a sending unit. The sending unit is configured to send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information, and the receiving unit is configured to receive, send, by the network device The first message, the first message is sent by the network device after determining the group in which the terminal is located according to the second message, where the first message is used to indicate whether the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal The sending unit is further configured to send an uplink signal to the network device if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
第十四方面,本申请提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备可包括多个功能模块,用于执行第六方面或第六方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该网络设备可包括:接收单元,确定单元,发送单元。其中,所述接收单元,用于接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;所述确定单元,用于根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组;所述发送单元,用于向所述终端发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;所述接收单元,还用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,接收所述终端发送的上行信号;所述发送单元,还用于根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。In a fourteenth aspect, the present application provides a network device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the sixth aspect or the sixth aspect. The network device may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit. The receiving unit is configured to receive a second message that is sent by the terminal, where the second message includes data bits that are used by the terminal to calculate packet information, and the determining unit is configured to use, according to the second message, Determining a group in which the terminal is located; the sending unit, configured to send a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged; the receiving unit, The method is further configured to: if the terminal in which the terminal is located, the terminal is paged, and receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal; the sending unit is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
第十五方面,本申请提供了一种终端,该终端可包括多个功能模块,用于相应的执行第七方面或第七方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该终端可包括:接收单元,发送单元。其中,所述发送单元,用于向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述接收单元,用于接收所述网络设备发送的寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引后发送的,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;所述发送单元,还用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,向所述网络设备发送上行信号。In a fifteenth aspect, the present application provides a terminal, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the seventh aspect or the seventh aspect. The terminal may include: a receiving unit, and a sending unit. The sending unit is configured to send a second message to the network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal, and the receiving unit is configured to receive a paging message sent by the network device, where The paging message is sent after the network device determines the truncation identifier or index of the terminal according to the second message, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal; And the unit is further configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, The network device sends an uplink signal.
第十六方面,本申请提供了一种网络设备,该网络设备可包括多个功能模块,用于执行第八方面或第八方面任意一种可能的实施方式所提供的方法。该网络设备可包括:接收单元,确定单元,发送单元。其中,所述接收单元,用于接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述确定单元,用于根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述发送单元,用于向所述终端发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;所述接收单元,还用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,收所述终端发送的上行信号。In a sixteenth aspect, the present application provides a network device, which may include a plurality of functional modules for performing the method provided by any one of the possible aspects of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect. The network device may include: a receiving unit, a determining unit, and a sending unit. The receiving unit is configured to receive a second message sent by the terminal, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal, and the determining unit is configured to determine, according to the second message, the terminal The sending unit is configured to send a paging message to the terminal, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal; the receiving unit is further configured to: The truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the uplink signal sent by the terminal is received.
结合第十三方面、第十四方面、第十五方面和第十六方面,在可选实施例中,所述第二消息在所述终端发起附着请求时发送。所述第二消息可通过以下至少一项发送:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。In conjunction with the thirteenth aspect, the fourteenth aspect, the fifteenth aspect, and the sixteenth aspect, in an alternative embodiment, the second message is sent when the terminal initiates an attach request. The second message may be sent by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
第十七方面,本申请提供了一种终端,用于执行第一方面或第三方面或第五方面或第七方面描述的信号传输方法。所述终端可包括:存储器以及与所述存储器耦合的处理器、收发器,其中:所述收发器用于与其他通信设备(如网络设备)通信。所述存储器用于存储第一方面或第三方面或第五方面或第七方面描述的信号传输方法的实现代码,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序代码,即执行第一方面或第三方面或第五方面或第七方面所提供的方法,或者第一方面或第三方面或第五方面或第七方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, the present application provides a terminal for performing the signal transmission method described in the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect. The terminal can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as network devices. The memory is used to store implementation code of the signal transmission method described in the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect, the processor is configured to execute program code stored in the memory, that is, perform the first aspect Or the method provided by the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect, or the method provided by any one of the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect or the seventh aspect possible embodiment.
第十八方面,本申请提供了一种网络设备,用于执行第二方面或第四方面或第六方面或第八方面描述的信号传输方法。所述终端可包括:存储器以及与所述存储器耦合的处理器、收发器,其中:所述收发器用于与其他通信设备(如终端)通信。所述存储器用于存储第二方面或第四方面或第六方面或第八方面描述的信号传输方法的实现代码,所述处理器用于执行所述存储器中存储的程序代码,即执行第二方面或第四方面或第六方面或第八方面所提供的方法,或者第二方面或第四方面或第六方面或第八方面可能的实施方式中的任意一种所提供的方法。In an eighteenth aspect, the present application provides a network device for performing the signal transmission method described in the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect. The terminal can include a memory and a processor, transceiver coupled to the memory, wherein the transceiver is for communicating with other communication devices, such as terminals. The memory is used to store implementation code of the signal transmission method described in the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect, the processor is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory, that is, perform the second aspect Or the method provided by the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect, or the method provided by any one of the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect or the eighth aspect possible embodiment.
第十九方面,提供了一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括:终端和网络设备。其中:In a nineteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, the communication system comprising: a terminal and a network device. among them:
所述终端可以是上述第九方面或第十一方面或第十三方面或第十五方面描述的终端,所述网络设备可以是上述第十方面或第十二方面或第十四方面或第十六方面描述的网络设备。所述终端也可以是上述第十七方面描述的终端,所述网络设备也可以是上述第十八方面描述的网络设备。The terminal may be the terminal described in the above ninth or eleventh aspect or the thirteenth aspect or the fifteenth aspect, and the network device may be the above tenth or twelfth aspect or the fourteenth aspect or the The network device described in the sixteenth aspect. The terminal may also be the terminal described in the above seventeenth aspect, and the network device may also be the network device described in the above eighteenth aspect.
本申请是实施例还提供了一种通信设备,包括存储器,处理器以及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的计算机程序,所述处理器执行所述程序时使得所述通信设备实现上述方法所执行的步骤。The present application is also an embodiment of a communication device including a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored on the memory and operable on the processor, the processor executing the program to cause the communication device to implement the above The steps performed by the method.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质,用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得上述任意可能的实现方式中的方法被执行。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable medium for storing a computer program, when the computer program is executed, causing a method in any of the above possible implementations to be executed.
本申请实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行的上述任意可能的实现方式中的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product comprising instructions, when executed on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method in any of the above possible implementation manners.
附图说明DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例中的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本发明的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application, the drawings used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly described below. It is obvious that the drawings in the following description are only some embodiments of the present invention. Other drawings may also be obtained from those of ordinary skill in the art in view of the drawings.
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统的结构示意图;1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of another communication method according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5为本申请提供的一种可能的用于计算分组信息的数据比特的数目和在终端标识中的位置的示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a possible number of data bits for calculating packet information and a location in a terminal identifier provided by the present application; FIG.
图6为本申请提供的一种可能的截断标识的数据比特数目和在终端标识中的位置的示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of the number of data bits of a possible truncation identifier and the location in the terminal identifier provided by the present application;
图7A-7G为本申请提供的信号传输方法的流程示意图;7A-7G are schematic flowcharts of a signal transmission method provided by the present application;
图8A-8D为本申请提供的无线通信系统,终端和网络设备的功能框图8A-8D are functional block diagrams of a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device provided by the present application.
图9为本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10为本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面结合附图,对本发明的实施例进行描述。Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
首选,对本申请中涉及的部分术语及相关技术进行解释说明,以方便理解:First, explain some of the terms and related technologies involved in this application to facilitate understanding:
1)终端设备1) Terminal equipment
本申请中的终端设备是一种具有无限通信功能的设备,可以是具有无线通信功能的手持设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备等。在不同的网络中终端设备可以叫做不同的名称,例如:用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、5G网络或未来演进网络中的终端设备等。The terminal device in the present application is a device having an infinite communication function, and may be a handheld device having a wireless communication function, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, a computing device, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem. Terminal devices in different networks may be called different names, such as: user equipment, access terminals, subscriber units, subscriber stations, mobile stations, mobile stations, remote stations, remote terminals, mobile devices, user terminals, terminals, wireless communications. Device, user agent or user device, cellular phone, cordless phone, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), Terminal equipment in a 5G network or a future evolution network.
2)基站2) Base station
本申请中的基站也可以称为基站设备,是一种部署在无线接入网用以提供无线通信功能的设备,可以是全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,简称GSM)或码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,简称CDMA)中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,简称BTS),也可以是宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,简称WCDMA)中的基站(NodeB,简称NB),还可以是长期演进(Long Term Evolution,简称LTE)中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,简称eNB或eNodeB),或者中继站或接入点,新空口(NR)系统中的传输节点或收发点(transmission reception point,TRP或者TP)或者下一代节点B(generation nodeB,gNB),无线保真(Wireless-Fidelity,Wi-Fi)的站点、无线回传节点、小站、微站,或者未来第五代移动通信(the 5th Generation Mobile Communication,5G)网络中的基站等,本申请在此并不限定。The base station in this application may also be referred to as a base station device, and is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide wireless communication functions, and may be Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) or code division multiple access. A Base Transceiver Station (BTS) in the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), or a base station (NodeB, NB for short) in Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA). It may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in Long Term Evolution (LTE), or a relay station or an access point, a transmission node or a transmission and reception point in a new air interface (NR) system. Reception point, TRP or TP) or next generation Node B (gNB), Wireless-Fidelity (Wi-Fi) site, wireless backhaul node, small station, micro station, or the fifth generation Base stations and the like in the 5th Generation Mobile Communication (5G) network are not limited herein.
3)波束3) Beam
波束(beam)可以理解为空间资源,可以指具有能量传输指向性的发送或接收预编码向量。并且,该发送或接收预编码向量能够通过索引信息进行标识。其中,所述能量传输指向性可以指在一定空间位置内,接收经过该预编码向量进行预编码处理后的信号具有较好的接收功率,如满足接收解调信噪比等;所述能量传输指向性也可以指通过该预编码向量接收来自不同空间位置发送的相同信号具有不同的接收功率。A beam can be understood as a spatial resource and can refer to a transmit or receive precoding vector with energy transmission directivity. And, the transmitting or receiving precoding vector can be identified by index information. The energy transmission directivity may be that the signal received by the precoding process after receiving the precoding vector has a good receiving power in a certain spatial position, such as satisfying the receiving demodulation signal to noise ratio, etc.; Directivity may also mean that the same signals transmitted from different spatial locations are received by the precoding vector with different received power.
可选地,同一通信设备(比如终端设备或网络设备)可以有不同的预编码向量,不同的设备也可以有不同的预编码向量,即对应不同的波束。针对通信设备的配置或者能力,一个通信设备在同一时刻可以使用多个不同的预编码向量中的一个或者多个,即同时可以形成一个或多个波束。波束的信息可以通过索引信息进行标识。可选地,所述索引信息可以对应配置用户设备(user equipment,UE)的资源标识,比如,所述索引信息可以对应配置的信道状态信息参考信号(Channel status information Reference Signal,CSI-RS)的ID或者资源,也可以对应配置的上行探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)的ID或者资源。或者,可选地,所述索引信息也可以是通过波束承载的信号或信道显示或隐式承载的索引信息,比如,所述索引信息可以是通过波束发送的同步信号或者广播信道指示该波束的索引信息。Optionally, the same communication device (such as a terminal device or a network device) may have different precoding vectors, and different devices may also have different precoding vectors, that is, corresponding to different beams. For a configuration or capability of a communication device, one communication device can use one or more of a plurality of different precoding vectors at the same time, ie, one or more beams can be formed at the same time. The information of the beam can be identified by the index information. Optionally, the index information may be corresponding to a resource identifier of a user equipment (UE), for example, the index information may correspond to a configured channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS). The ID or resource may also correspond to the ID or resource of the configured Sounding Reference Signal (SRS). Alternatively, the index information may also be index information of a signal or channel display or implicit bearer carried by the beam, for example, the index information may be a synchronization signal sent by a beam or a broadcast channel indicating the beam. Index information.
beam pair可以包括发送端的发送波束和接收端的接收波束,或者,也称作上行波束或下行波束。比如,beam pair可以包括gNB Tx beam传输波束或UE Rx beam接收波束,或者, UE Tx beam传输波束或gNB Rx beam接收波束,其中,传输波束还可以理解为发送波束。The beam pair may include a transmit beam at the transmitting end and a receive beam at the receiving end, or also referred to as an uplink beam or a downlink beam. For example, the beam pair may include a gNB Tx beam transmission beam or a UE Rx beam reception beam, or a UE Tx beam transmission beam or a gNB Rx beam reception beam, where the transmission beam may also be understood as a transmission beam.
波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束成形技术或者其他技术手段。波束成形技术可以具体为数字波束成形技术,模拟波束成形技术,混合数字/模拟波束成形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道,控制信道和探测信号等,例如,发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。波束还可以是空域滤波器(spatial filter)。The beam can be a wide beam, or a narrow beam, or other type of beam. The beamforming technique can be beamforming techniques or other technical means. The beamforming technology can be specifically digital beamforming technology, analog beamforming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be transmitted through different beams. Alternatively, multiple beams having the same or similar communication characteristics can be considered as one beam. One beam may include one or more antenna ports for transmitting a data channel, a control channel, a sounding signal, etc., for example, the transmitting beam may be a signal intensity distribution formed in different directions of the space after the signal is transmitted through the antenna. The receive beam may refer to a signal strength distribution of wireless signals received from the antenna in different directions in space. One or more antenna ports forming one beam can also be considered as one antenna port set. The beam can also be a spatial filter.
4)LTE中的系统帧4) System frames in LTE
在LTE系统中,信道的发送以无线帧为单位,一个无线帧(radio frame)包括10个子帧(subframe),每一个子帧的长度为1毫秒(ms),每个子帧均包括两个时隙(slot),每个slot为0.5ms。每个slot包括的符号的个数与子帧中CP(cyclic prefix,循环前缀)长度相关。如果CP为normal(普通)CP,则每个slot包括7个符号,每个子帧由14个符号组成,例如,每个子帧由序号分别为#0,#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6,#7,#8,#9,#10,#11,#12,#13的符号组成。如果CP为extended(长)CP,每个slot包括6个符号,每个子帧由12个符号组成,例如每个子帧由序号分别为#0,#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6,#7,#8,#9,#10,#11的符号组成。下行符号称为正交频分多址(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号。LTE系统中,资源单元(resource element,RE)是时频域上最小的单元,由索引对(k,l)唯一标识,其中,k为子载波索引,l为符号索引。In the LTE system, the transmission of the channel is in units of radio frames, and one radio frame includes 10 subframes, each subframe has a length of 1 millisecond (ms), and each subframe includes two subframes. Slot, each slot is 0.5ms. The number of symbols included in each slot is related to the length of the CP (cyclic prefix) in the subframe. If the CP is a normal (normal) CP, each slot includes 7 symbols, and each subframe is composed of 14 symbols. For example, each subframe has a sequence number of #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, respectively. , #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13 symbol composition. If the CP is an extended (long) CP, each slot includes 6 symbols, and each subframe is composed of 12 symbols. For example, each subframe has a sequence number of #0, #1, #2, #3, #4,# 5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11 symbol composition. The downlink symbols are called orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. In the LTE system, a resource element (RE) is the smallest unit in the time-frequency domain, and is uniquely identified by an index pair (k, l), where k is a subcarrier index and l is a symbol index.
5)通信资源5) Communication resources
在本申请中,通信资源也可以简称为资源。通信资源可用于传输信号。通信资源具有多种类型。例如:从物理特性的角度,通信资源的类型可以是空间资源,时域资源,和频域资源。例如:从不同的表现形式的角度,通信资源的类型可以是波束,端口等。不同种类的通信资源的集合也是一种通信资源。例如:时频资源块(包括时域资源和频域资源)是一种通信资源,波束和端口的组合也是一种通信资源。In the present application, a communication resource may also be simply referred to as a resource. Communication resources can be used to transmit signals. There are many types of communication resources. For example, from the perspective of physical characteristics, the types of communication resources may be spatial resources, time domain resources, and frequency domain resources. For example, from the perspective of different manifestations, the types of communication resources may be beams, ports, and the like. A collection of different kinds of communication resources is also a communication resource. For example, a time-frequency resource block (including a time domain resource and a frequency domain resource) is a communication resource, and a combination of a beam and a port is also a communication resource.
6)其他术语6) Other terms
本文中的术语“多个”是指两个或两个以上。The term "plurality" as used herein refers to two or more.
本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。The term "and/or" in this context is merely an association describing the associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate that A exists separately, and both A and B exist, respectively. B these three situations. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
本申请中的术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。The terms "first" and "second" in this application are used for descriptive purposes only, and are not to be construed as indicating or implying a relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Thus, features defining "first" and "second" may include one or more of the features either explicitly or implicitly.
在LTE中,基站在每个帧内寻呼4次,每次为16个用户,每一个帧为10ms,因此基站在每秒内最多可以呼叫6400个用户。在NR当中SS block的最大数目是64,每一个帧里面的最大PO数目是4,在一个PO中,一个波束的数据至少占2个OFDM符号,第一个符号为PDCCH,第二个为PDSCH。四个PO占用的扫描资源为512个OFDM符号。对于120KHz的子载波间隔,一个 帧共有1120个符号,则有45%(512/1120)的寻呼资源被占用。对于有限的寻呼资源来讲是一个极大的开销。In LTE, the base station pages 4 times in each frame, each time 16 users, each frame is 10ms, so the base station can call up to 6400 users per second. The maximum number of SS blocks in NR is 64, and the maximum number of POs in each frame is 4. In one PO, the data of one beam occupies at least 2 OFDM symbols, the first symbol is PDCCH, and the second is PDSCH. . The scanning resources occupied by the four POs are 512 OFDM symbols. For a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz, one frame has a total of 1120 symbols, and 45% (512/1120) of paging resources are occupied. It is a huge overhead for limited paging resources.
通过降低PO的数量并增大PO内终端设备标识的数目,可以降低寻呼资源对总的资源的占用。然而终端设备标识数目的增加,将会增大PO内的带宽,终端设备在一个比较大的带宽内搜索终端设备标识会增大功耗的开销。By reducing the number of POs and increasing the number of terminal device identifiers in the PO, the occupation of paging resources by the total resources can be reduced. However, the increase in the number of terminal device identifications will increase the bandwidth within the PO, and the terminal device searching for the terminal device identifier within a relatively large bandwidth increases the overhead of power consumption.
图1示出了本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统。所述无线通信系统可以工作在高频频段上,不限于LTE系统,还可以是5G系统、NR系统,机器与机器通信(machine to machine,M2M)系统等。如图1所示,无线通信系统100可包括:一个或多个网络设备101,一个或多个终端103。其中:FIG. 1 shows a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application. The wireless communication system can operate in a high frequency band, not limited to an LTE system, and can also be a 5G system, an NR system, a machine to machine (M2M) system, or the like. As shown in FIG. 1, wireless communication system 100 can include one or more network devices 101, one or more terminals 103. among them:
网络设备101可以为接入网设备,如基站,基站可以用于与一个或多个终端进行通信,也可以用于与一个或多个具有部分终端功能的基站进行通信(比如宏基站与微基站,如接入点,之间的通信)。网络设备101还可以为核心网设备,可以用于与基站或者终端103通信。核心网设备可以是移动性管理实体(mobility management entity,MME),以及未来5G中的移动性管理设备等。The network device 101 may be an access network device, such as a base station, and the base station may be used to communicate with one or more terminals, or may be used to communicate with one or more base stations having partial terminal functions (such as a macro base station and a micro base station). , such as access points, communication between). Network device 101 can also be a core network device that can be used to communicate with a base station or terminal 103. The core network device may be a mobility management entity (MME), and a mobility management device in the future 5G.
终端103可以分布在整个无线通信系统100中,可以是静止的,也可以是移动的。 Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile.
本申请中,无线通信系统100是多波束通信系统。其中:In the present application, the wireless communication system 100 is a multi-beam communication system. among them:
网络设备101可以被配置有大规模的天线阵列,并利用波束成形技术控制天线阵列形成不同指向的波束。The network device 101 can be configured with a large-scale antenna array and utilize beamforming techniques to control the antenna array to form beams of different orientations.
可理解的,一个终端处于某一个确定的位置时,对应落入一个或多个指向波束的发送范围内,该终端在该确定的位置时能够接收到使用上述一个或多个指向波束发送的信号。It can be understood that when a terminal is in a certain determined position, corresponding to the transmission range of one or more pointing beams, the terminal can receive the signal transmitted by using the one or more pointing beams at the determined position. .
在寻呼过程中,由于网络设备101并不知道被寻呼的终端处于哪个位置,网络设备101需要使用多个不同指向的波束发送寻呼消息(paging),以覆盖整个小区107,确保被寻呼的终端接收到寻呼消息,该过程可称为波束扫描(Beam scanning)。In the paging process, since the network device 101 does not know which location the paged terminal is in, the network device 101 needs to use a plurality of different pointing beams to send a paging message to cover the entire cell 107, ensuring that it is sought. The calling terminal receives the paging message, and the process may be referred to as Beam scanning.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备101可以配置一个PO寻呼的用户数目或终端设备标识(UE identification,UE ID)数目。所述终端设备标识可以是UE ID的全部,也可以是UE ID的部分,还可以是基于索引的UE ID(Index-Based UE ID)。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device 101 may configure the number of users of one PO page or the number of terminal identification (UE identification). The terminal device identifier may be all of the UE ID, or may be part of the UE ID, or may be an index-based UE ID.
网络设备101可以通过网络配置信息,例如通过系统信息、RRC信令、MAC-CE信令、RMSI或者系统信息块SIB中的至少一项中配置一个PO寻呼的用户数目或UE ID数目。The network device 101 may configure the number of users or the number of UE IDs of one PO page in at least one of system information, RRC signaling, MAC-CE signaling, RMSI, or system information block SIB through network configuration information.
具体的,PO的最大UE ID数目,可以与SS block数目相关,也与寻呼机制相关,还可以与SCS相关。Specifically, the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO may be related to the number of SS blocks, related to the paging mechanism, and related to the SCS.
当PO的最大UE ID数目与SS block数目相关时,N=1时,UE ID最大数目可以为16;N<=4或8时,UE ID最大数目可以为32;N>=8 UE ID最大数目可以为64或32。其中,N为When the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO is related to the number of SS blocks, when N=1, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 16; when N<=4 or 8, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32; N>=8 The maximum number of UE IDs The number can be 64 or 32. Where N is
当PO的最大UE ID数目与寻呼机制相关时,例如如果寻呼机制是波束扫描方式,UE ID的最大数目可以为32或64;如果寻呼机制是宽波束或者全向波束模式,UE ID的最大数目可以为16;如果寻呼机制是LTE模式,UE ID的最大数目可以为16。When the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO is related to the paging mechanism, for example, if the paging mechanism is the beam scanning mode, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32 or 64; if the paging mechanism is a wide beam or an omnidirectional beam mode, the maximum number of UE IDs It may be 16; if the paging mechanism is in LTE mode, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 16.
当PO的最大UE ID数目与SCS相关时,例如如果SCS=15KHz,UE ID最大数目可以为16;如果SCS=30KHz,UE ID最大数目可以为32;如果SCS=120KHz,UE ID最大数目可以为64或32。When the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO is related to the SCS, for example, if SCS=15KHz, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 16; if SCS=30KHz, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32; if SCS=120KHz, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 64 or 32.
当PO的最大UE ID数目与频段相关时,如果频段高于6GHz,UE ID最大数目可以为64或32;如果频段为3GHz至6GHz,UE ID最大数目可以为32或64;如果频段低于3GHz,UE ID的 最大数目可以为16或者32。When the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO is related to the frequency band, if the frequency band is higher than 6 GHz, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 64 or 32; if the frequency band is 3 GHz to 6 GHz, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32 or 64; if the frequency band is lower than 3 GHz The maximum number of UE IDs can be 16 or 32.
当PO的最大UE ID数目与寻呼消息的传输带宽相关时,例如在120KHz的子载波下,传输带宽高于100M,UE ID最大数目可以为64或32;如果在120KHz的子载波下,传输带宽小于100M,UE ID的最大数目可以为16或者32。When the maximum number of UE IDs of the PO is related to the transmission bandwidth of the paging message, for example, under a subcarrier of 120 kHz, the transmission bandwidth is higher than 100 M, and the maximum number of UE IDs may be 64 or 32; if the transmission is performed under subcarriers of 120 kHz, The bandwidth is less than 100M, and the maximum number of UE IDs can be 16 or 32.
当PO的最大UE ID数目与TA区域相关时,如果TA区域的基站数目大于32,UE ID的最大数目可以为64;如果TA区域的基站数目大于8小于32,UE ID的最大数目可以为32;如果TA区域的基站数目小于8,UE ID的最大数目可以为16。When the number of the maximum number of UEs of the PO is related to the TA area, if the number of base stations in the TA area is greater than 32, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 64; if the number of base stations in the TA area is greater than 8 and less than 32, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 32. If the number of base stations in the TA area is less than 8, the maximum number of UE IDs may be 16.
网络设备101配置一个PO寻呼的终端设备数目或UE ID数目的方法可以有多种。例如,可以以X个终端设备为一组,例如X=16,网络设备配置Y组,例如Y=4;即配置一次可以同时寻呼16*4=64个终端设备。这样终端设备103可以根据X和Y的值,以及UE ID中的至少一项来确定该终端设备的PO。可选的,网络设备101确定PO的方法可以是查询预先配置的表格的方式确定。可选的,网络设备101也可以配置最多能够寻呼的终端设备的总的数目。There are various methods for the network device 101 to configure the number of terminal devices or the number of UE IDs for one PO paging. For example, the group of X terminal devices may be grouped, for example, X=16, and the network device is configured with Y groups, for example, Y=4; that is, one time can be configured to simultaneously page 16*4=64 terminal devices. Thus, the terminal device 103 can determine the PO of the terminal device based on at least one of the values of X and Y, and the UE ID. Optionally, the method for the network device 101 to determine the PO may be determined by querying a pre-configured form. Alternatively, the network device 101 can also configure the total number of terminal devices that can be paged at most.
可选的,当网络设备101一次调度多个组的终端设备103或者调度终端设备103的数目较多时,可以采用一个PDCCH调度多个PDSCH,也可以一个PDCCH调度一个PDSCH。Optionally, when the number of the terminal devices 103 or the scheduling terminal devices 103 of the multiple groups is scheduled by the network device 101 at one time, multiple PDSCHs may be scheduled by using one PDCCH, or one PDSCH may be scheduled by one PDCCH.
当网络设备101通过降低PO的数量并增大PO内终端设备标识的数目时,终端设备103的标识数目会增加,将会进而增大PO内的带宽。终端设备103在一个比较大的带宽内搜索终端设备标识会增大功耗的开销。When the network device 101 reduces the number of POs and increases the number of terminal device identifications within the PO, the number of identifications of the terminal devices 103 increases, which in turn increases the bandwidth within the PO. The terminal device 103 searches for the terminal device identity within a relatively large bandwidth to increase the overhead of power consumption.
本申请实施例提供一种通信的方法和设备,以降低终端设备在搜索终端设备标识时功耗开销大的问题。The embodiment of the present invention provides a communication method and device, so as to reduce the problem that the terminal device has a large power consumption when searching for the terminal device identifier.
参考图2,图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图。如图2所示,所述方法包括:Referring to FIG. 2, FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes:
步骤100:当网络设备向终端设备指示物理下行共享信道(Physical Down Link Shared Channel,PDSCH)时频资源块的信息时,所述网络设备向终端设备发送DCI,所述DCI中包括PDSCH时频资源块的信息;所述第一PDSCH时频资源块包括一个以上的第二PDSCH时频资源块,每个第二PDSCH时频资源块提供至少一个终端设备的寻呼信息,即每个第二PDSCH时频资源块映射至少一个终端设备的标识;Step 100: When the network device indicates the information of the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) time-frequency resource block to the terminal device, the network device sends the DCI to the terminal device, where the DCI includes the PDSCH time-frequency resource. Information of the block; the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes one or more second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides paging information of at least one terminal device, that is, each second PDSCH The time-frequency resource block maps an identifier of at least one terminal device;
其中,所述网络设备可以通过物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)向终端设备发送DCI。The network device may send the DCI to the terminal device by using a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH).
其中,网络设备向终端设备发送PDCCH主要用于向终端设备发送下行调度信息,以便终端设备接收PDSCH。DCI中指定了PDSCH所占的资源、调制和编码策略(modulation and coding scheme,MCS)、初传或重传相关信息、层、预编码等信息。网络设备可以先配置DCI的内容,然后再向终端设备发送。The PDCCH is sent by the network device to the terminal device, and is used to send downlink scheduling information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device receives the PDSCH. The DCI specifies the resources occupied by the PDSCH, the modulation and coding scheme (MCS), the information related to the initial transmission or retransmission, the layer, and the precoding. The network device can configure the content of the DCI before sending it to the terminal device.
其中,所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的信息包括但不限于:所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的子载波位置、符号位置、解调方法等。The information of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
具体的,所述网络设备可以根据终端设备的标识所对应的分组,将一个大的第一PDSCH时频资源块分割为W个小的第二PDSCH的时频资源块,其中W>1,例如W=4或2。由于每个终端设备的标识都会对应一个分组,每个分组中包括多个终端设备的标识。所述网络设备根据每个终端设备的标识所对应的分组,将一个大的第一PDSCH时频资源块所映射的终端设备的标识,按照每个终端设备所在的分组进行划分,得到小于所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的第二 PDSCH时频资源块。Specifically, the network device may divide a large first PDSCH time-frequency resource block into W small time-frequency resource blocks of the second PDSCH according to the packet corresponding to the identifier of the terminal device, where W>1, for example, W=4 or 2. Since the identifier of each terminal device corresponds to one packet, each packet includes an identifier of a plurality of terminal devices. The network device divides, according to the packet corresponding to the identifier of each terminal device, the identifier of the terminal device mapped by a large first PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the group in which each terminal device is located, and obtains less than the A second PDSCH time-frequency resource block of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
可选的,网络设备也可以将第一PDSCH时频资源块所调度的终端设备的标识对10取余,根据取余后的结果确定分组。例如,将取余的结果为0-3的为一组,将取余的结果为4-7的为一组,将取余的结果为8-9的为一组。需要说明的是,对10取余只是一种举例,在具体实现时,也可以对其它的数值取余,本申请实施例不做限定。Optionally, the network device may also allocate the identifier of the terminal device scheduled by the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block to 10, and determine the packet according to the result of the redundancy. For example, the result of the remainder is a group of 0-3, the result of the remainder is a group of 4-7, and the result of the remainder is a group of 8-9. It should be noted that the remainder of the present invention is only an example. In the specific implementation, other values may be used.
可选的,为简化终端设备获取其所属的第二PDSCH的位置,每个第二PDSCH时频资源块的大小可以相同。当然,每个第二PDSCH时频资源块的大小也可以不同,本申请实施例不限定具体的实现方式。Optionally, to simplify the location where the terminal device acquires the second PDSCH to which the terminal device belongs, the size of each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same. Certainly, the size of each of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks may also be different. The specific implementation manner is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,每个第二PDSCH时频资源块的MSC可以相同。这样,能够降低因指示MSC造成的PDCCH资源的开销。Optionally, the MSC of each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same. In this way, the overhead of PDCCH resources caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
可选的,所述一个以上的第二PDSCH时频资源块的数量,可以由网络设备通过发送DCI或网络配置信息发送给终端设备,终端设备根据接收到的DCI或网络配置信息中指示的第二PDSCH时频资源块的数量,确定第二PDSCH时频资源块的数量。所述网络配置信息包括但不限于系统信息、RRC信令、MAC-CE信令、RMSI、SIB1或者系统信息块中的至少一项。当然,也可以通过预先配置的方式,确定网络设备发送的DCI调度的第二PDSCH时频资源块的数量。Optionally, the number of the one or more second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks may be sent by the network device to the terminal device by sending DCI or network configuration information, where the terminal device indicates according to the received DCI or network configuration information. The number of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks determines the number of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks. The network configuration information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of system information, RRC signaling, MAC-CE signaling, RMSI, SIB1, or system information blocks. Certainly, the number of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks scheduled by the DCI sent by the network device may also be determined in a pre-configured manner.
可选的,所述DCI中还可以包括每个第二PDSCH时频资源块中终端设备标识的数目。这样,可以用来代替资源块字段的分配,由于资源块字段占用的比特数较多,终端设备标识的数目占用的比特数目较少,就能够节省DCI字段的比特开销。Optionally, the number of terminal device identifiers in each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may also be included in the DCI. In this way, the allocation of the resource block field can be used instead. Since the number of bits occupied by the resource block field is large and the number of bits of the terminal device identifier is small, the bit overhead of the DCI field can be saved.
可选的,所述网络设备包括但不限于:基站、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)或中继。Optionally, the network device includes but is not limited to: a base station, a transmission reception point (TRP), or a relay.
步骤102:终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的DCI,根据所述DCI确定第二PDSCH时频资源块;Step 102: The terminal device receives the DCI sent by the network device, and determines a second PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the DCI.
所述第二PDSCH时频资源块即需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块。The second PDSCH time-frequency resource block is a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated.
可选的,所述终端设备根据其自身标识确定第二PDSCH时频资源块包括但不限于:Optionally, the determining, by the terminal device, the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to its own identifier includes but is not limited to:
根据对所述终端设备标识全部或部分数据比特对N取余得到其自身标识对应的第二PDSCH时频资源块的编号或位置。其中,N的取值为所述第一PDSCH时频资源块被分割为N个第二PDSCH的时频资源块时N的取值。The number or location of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to its own identity is obtained by allocating all or part of the data bits to the terminal device. The value of N is the value of N when the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block is divided into time-frequency resource blocks of the N second PDSCHs.
步骤104:所述终端设备解调步骤102中确定的第二PDSCH时频资源块。Step 104: The terminal device demodulates the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined in step 102.
上述方法中,所述终端设备首先确定自身标识所对应的第二PDSCH时频资源块,并通过解调确定的第二PDSCH时频资源块。相对于解调大于第二PDSCH时频资源块的第一PDSCH时频资源块,减少了终端设备因解调PDSCH时频资源块带来的功耗开销。In the above method, the terminal device first determines a second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity, and demodulates the determined second PDSCH time-frequency resource block. Compared with demodulating the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block that is larger than the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the power consumption overhead of the terminal device due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced.
可选的,上述方法在步骤104之后,还可以包括:所述终端设备根据解调后的所述第二PDSCH时频资源块,查找自己的标识是否在解调后的第二PDSCH时频资源块中。这样,终端设备能够获知自己是否被寻呼。Optionally, after the step 104, the method may further include: the terminal device, according to the demodulated second PDSCH time-frequency resource block, searching whether the second identifier of the second PDSCH is the demodulated time resource. In the block. In this way, the terminal device can know whether or not it is paged.
作为一种可选的实现方式,网络设备也可以指示终端设备调度的PDSCH时频资源块大小的信息。为清楚描述本申请实施例提供的方法,下面以网络设备调度两个PDSCH时频资源块为例描述本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的实现方式。可以理解,对于网络设备调度N(N为大于等于1的正整数)个PDSCH时频资源块的实现方式,与下面描述的实现方式类似,不再赘述。As an optional implementation manner, the network device may also indicate information about a PDSCH time-frequency resource block size scheduled by the terminal device. For a clear description of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, an implementation manner of another communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described below by taking a network device scheduling two PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks as an example. It can be understood that the implementation manner of the network device scheduling N (N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1) PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is similar to the implementation manner described below, and details are not described herein again.
参考图3,图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图。如图3所示,所述方法包括:Referring to FIG. 3, FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the method includes:
步骤200:当网络设备向终端设备指示PDSCH时频资源块的信息时,所述网络设备通过PDCCH发送DCI,所述DCI包括第一PDSCH时频资源块的信息和所述第一PDSCH时频资源块中的第二PDSCH时频资源块的信息,所述第一PDSCH时频资源块包括第二PDSCH时频资源块和第三PDSCH时频资源块;所述第二PDSCH时频资源块映射至少一个终端设备的标识,所述第三PDSCH时频资源块映射至少一个终端设备的标识;Step 200: When the network device indicates the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block to the terminal device, the network device sends the DCI by using the PDCCH, where the DCI includes the information of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the first PDSCH time-frequency resource. The information of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the block, where the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes a second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and a third PDSCH time-frequency resource block; and the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block maps at least An identifier of a terminal device, where the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block maps an identifier of at least one terminal device;
所述DCI还包括所述第二PDSCH时频资源块的MCS。网络设备可以先配置DCI的内容,然后再向终端设备发送。The DCI further includes an MCS of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block. The network device can configure the content of the DCI before sending it to the terminal device.
其中,所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的信息包括但不限于:所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的子载波位置、符号位置、解调方法等。所述第二PDSCH时频资源块的信息包括但不限于:所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的子载波位置、符号位置、解调方法等。The information of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block. The information of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block includes, but is not limited to, a subcarrier position, a symbol position, a demodulation method, and the like of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
可选的,网络设备通过PDCCH发送的DCI中,也可以只包括第二PDSCH时频资源块的信息和第三PDSCH时频资源块的信息。Optionally, the DCI that is sent by the network device through the PDCCH may also include only the information of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the information of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
可选的,为简化终端设备获取其所属的第二PDSCH的位置,所述第二PDSCH时频资源块和所述第三PDSCH时频资源块的大小可以相同。当然,所述第二PDSCH时频资源块和所述第三PDSCH时频资源块的大小也可以不同。本申请实施例不限定具体的实现方式。Optionally, to simplify the location of the second PDSCH to which the terminal device acquires, the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same. Certainly, the sizes of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may also be different. The embodiment of the present application does not limit a specific implementation manner.
可选的,所述第二PDSCH时频资源块和所述第三PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略相同。所述第二PDSCH时频资源块和所述第三PDSCH时频资源块的MCS相同,能够降低因指示MSC造成的PDCCH资源的开销。Optionally, the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block have the same modulation and coding strategy. The second PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the same as the MCS of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block, and the overhead of the PDCCH resource caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
可选的,所述DCI中还可以包括每个第二PDSCH时频资源块中终端设备标识的数目,可以用来代替资源块字段的分配,节省DCI字段的开销。Optionally, the DCI may further include a number of terminal device identifiers in each second PDSCH time-frequency resource block, which may be used to replace the allocation of resource block fields, and save the overhead of the DCI field.
可选的,所述网络设备包括但不限于:基站、TRP或中继。Optionally, the network device includes but is not limited to: a base station, a TRP, or a relay.
步骤202:终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的DCI,根据自身标识确定PDSCH时频资源块。Step 202: The terminal device receives the DCI sent by the network device, and determines a PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the identity of the PDSCH.
具体的,所述终端设备解调完接收到的PDCCH之后,可以获取所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的大小和所述第二PDSCH时频资源块的大小。所述终端设备根据所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的大小和所述第二PDSCH时频资源块的大小,能够进一步获取所述第三PDSCH时频资源块的大小。例如,所述终端设备通过将所述第一PDSCH时频资源块的大小减去所述第二PDSCH时频资源块的大小,得到第三PDSCH时频资源块的大小。Specifically, after the terminal device demodulates the received PDCCH, the size of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be acquired. The terminal device may further acquire the size of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the size of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block. For example, the terminal device obtains the size of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block by subtracting the size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block from the size of the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
所述终端设备接收到的DCI中还可以包括所述第二PDSCH时频资源块和第三PDSCH时频资源块的MCS。The DCS received by the terminal device may further include the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the MCS of the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
可选的,所述终端设备可以根据自身的标识查找自身标识所在的PDSCH时频资源块的位置。Optionally, the terminal device may search for the location of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block where the identity is located according to the identifier of the terminal.
可选的,所述终端设备确定其自身标识对应的第二PDSCH时频资源块包括但不限于:Optionally, the terminal device determines that the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the terminal device includes but is not limited to:
根据对所述终端设备标识全部或部分数据比特对N取余得到其自身标识对应的第二PDSCH时频资源块的编号或位置。其中,所述N可以为任意的正整数。The number or location of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to its own identity is obtained by allocating all or part of the data bits to the terminal device. Wherein, the N may be any positive integer.
其中,所述终端设备的标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块可以是所述第二PDSCH时频资源块或所述第三PDSCH时频资源块。所述第二PDSCH时频资源块和所述第三PDSCH时频资源块可以是独立的编码过程。所述第二PDSCH时频资源块和所述第三PDSCH时频资源块的大小可以相 同,也可以不同。The PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identifier of the terminal device may be the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block or the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block. The second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be independent coding processes. The size of the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the third PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same or different.
步骤204:所述终端设备解调步骤202中确定的PDSCH时频资源块。Step 204: The terminal device demodulates the PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined in step 202.
上述方法中,所述终端设备首先确定自身标识所对应的PDSCH时频资源块(第二PDSCH时频资源块或第三PDSCH时频资源块),并通过解调确定的PDSCH时频资源块判断自身的标识是否在确定的PDSCH时频资源块中。相对于解调大于第一PDSCH时频资源块,减少了终端设备因解调PDSCH时频资源块带来的功耗开销。In the above method, the terminal device first determines a PDSCH time-frequency resource block (a second PDSCH time-frequency resource block or a third PDSCH time-frequency resource block) corresponding to the identifier, and determines the PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined by demodulation. Whether its own identity is in the determined PDSCH time-frequency resource block. Compared with the demodulation being greater than the first PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the power consumption overhead of the terminal device due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced.
可选的,上述方法在步骤204之后,还可以包括:所述终端设备根据解调后的PDSCH时频资源块,查找自己的标识是否在解调的PDSCH时频资源块所携带的信息中。这样,终端设备能够获知自己是否被寻呼。Optionally, after the step 204, the method may further include: the terminal device, according to the demodulated PDSCH time-frequency resource block, searching whether the identifier of the PDSCH is in the information carried by the demodulated PDSCH time-frequency resource block. In this way, the terminal device can know whether or not it is paged.
参考图4,图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图。如图4所示,所述方法包括:Referring to FIG. 4, FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4, the method includes:
步骤300:当网络设备向终端设备指示PDSCH时频资源块的信息时,所述网络设备通过一个PDCCH调度N个PDSCH时频资源块,所述网络设备发送的DCI中包括每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或所述网络设备通过N个PDCCH调度N个PDSCH时频资源块,所述网络设备发送N个DCI,每个DCI中包括一个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;Step 300: When the network device indicates the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block to the terminal device, the network device schedules, by using one PDCCH, N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, where the DCI sent by the network device includes each PDSCH time-frequency resource. The information of the block; or the network device schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks by using N PDCCHs, where the network device sends N DCIs, and each DCI includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block;
其中,所述N可以为任意的正整数。可选的,所述N的取值可以由网络设备通过发送DCI、网络配置信息发送给终端设备,终端设备根据接收到的DCI或网络配置信息中指示的N的取值,确定PDSCH时频资源块的数量。所述网络配置信息包括但不限于系统信息、RRC信令、MAC-CE信令、RMSI、SIB1或者系统信息块中的至少一项。当然,也可以通过预先配置的方式,确定网络设备发送的DCI调度的PDSCH时频资源块的数量。Wherein, the N may be any positive integer. Optionally, the value of the N may be sent by the network device to the terminal device by sending the DCI and the network configuration information, and the terminal device determines the PDSCH time-frequency resource according to the value of the N in the received DCI or the network configuration information. The number of blocks. The network configuration information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of system information, RRC signaling, MAC-CE signaling, RMSI, SIB1, or system information blocks. Certainly, the number of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks scheduled by the DCI transmitted by the network device may also be determined in a pre-configured manner.
可选的,上述DCI中可以包括PDSCH时频资源块的大小和MCS。Optionally, the size of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block and the MCS may be included in the foregoing DCI.
可选的,为简化终端设备获取其所属的PDSCH的位置,每个PDSCH时频资源块的大小可以相同。当然,每个PDSCH时频资源块的大小也可以不同,本申请实施例不限定具体的实现方式。Optionally, in order to simplify the location of the PDSCH to which the terminal device acquires, the size of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same. Certainly, the size of each of the PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks may be different. The specific implementation manner is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,每个PDSCH时频资源块的MSC可以相同。这样,能够降低因指示MSC造成的PDCCH资源的开销。Optionally, the MSC of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block may be the same. In this way, the overhead of PDCCH resources caused by the indication MSC can be reduced.
可选的,上述DCI还可以包括终端设备标识的分组索引信息、PO索引、或PDSCH索引。Optionally, the foregoing DCI may further include packet index information, a PO index, or a PDSCH index of the terminal device identifier.
可选的,所述DCI中还可以包括每个PDSCH时频资源块中终端设备标识的数目。这样,可以用来代替资源块字段的分配,由于资源块字段占用的比特数较多,终端设备标识的数目占用的比特数目较少,就能够节省DCI字段的比特开销。Optionally, the number of terminal device identifiers in each PDSCH time-frequency resource block may also be included in the DCI. In this way, the allocation of the resource block field can be used instead. Since the number of bits occupied by the resource block field is large and the number of bits of the terminal device identifier is small, the bit overhead of the DCI field can be saved.
可选的,所述网络设备包括但不限于:基站、TRP或中继。Optionally, the network device includes but is not limited to: a base station, a TRP, or a relay.
步骤302:终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的DCI,根据自身标识确定PDSCH时频资源块;Step 302: The terminal device receives the DCI sent by the network device, and determines a PDSCH time-frequency resource block according to the identity of the terminal.
可选的,所述终端设备确定其自身标识确定与自身标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块包括但不限于:Optionally, the terminal device determines that its own identity determines that the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the terminal includes, but is not limited to:
根据终端设备的自身标识查找其自身标识所在的分组信息、资源位置信息和MCS,以确定与自身标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块。或,根据终端设备的自身标识查找其自身标识所在的PO index、资源位置信息和MCS,确定与自身标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块。The packet information, the resource location information, and the MCS where the identity of the terminal device is located are searched according to the identity of the terminal device to determine a PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the terminal device. Or, the PO index, the resource location information, and the MCS where the own identifier is located are searched according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identifier is determined.
例如,终端设备将其自身标识对分组数目取余或者将自身标识的部分对PDSCH时频资源块的数目进行取余,取余得到的值与DCI中的PO索引或者分组索引进行对比,获取与取余得 到的值的相同PDSCH索引或者PO索引的PDSCH资源块的位置,以确定PDSCH时频资源块。For example, the terminal device spares its own identity to the number of packets or spares the part identified by itself to the number of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and compares the obtained value with the PO index or the packet index in the DCI to obtain and The position of the same PDSCH index of the obtained value or the PDSCH resource block of the PO index is taken to determine a PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
步骤304:所述终端设备解调步骤302中确定的PDSCH时频资源块。Step 304: The terminal device demodulates the PDSCH time-frequency resource block determined in step 302.
上述方法中,所述终端设备根据DCI中的确定自身标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块,并通过解调确定的PDSCH时频资源块判断自身的标识是否在确定的PDSCH时频资源块中。由于只针对自身标识对应的时频资源块进行解调,相对于解调大于自身标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块,减少了终端设备因解调PDSCH时频资源块带来的功耗开销。In the above method, the terminal device determines, according to the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity identifier in the DCI, and determines whether the identity of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is in the determined PDSCH time-frequency resource block by demodulating the determined PDSCH time-frequency resource block. Since the demodulation is performed only for the time-frequency resource block corresponding to the self-identification, the power consumption overhead of the terminal device due to demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is reduced relative to the demodulation of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the self-identification.
可选的,上述方法在步骤304之后,还可以包括:所述终端设备根据解调后的PDSCH时频资源块,查找自己的标识是否在该的PDSCH所携带的信息中。Optionally, after the step 304, the method may further include: the terminal device searching, according to the demodulated PDSCH time-frequency resource block, whether the identifier of the PDSCH is carried in the information carried by the PDSCH.
作为另外一种实现方式,上述步骤300中,所述网络设备通过N个PDCCH调度N个PDSCH时频资源块时,所述N个不同的PDCCH可以采用M个不同的P-RNTI加扰。As another implementation manner, in the foregoing step 300, when the network device schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks by using N PDCCHs, the N different PDCCHs may be scrambled by using M different P-RNTIs.
当每个PDCCH调度的PDSCH内容是不同分组的终端设备的标识时,不同的分组信息可以通过不同的P-RNTI指示。When the PDSCH content scheduled by each PDCCH is the identity of the terminal device of a different packet, different packet information may be indicated by different P-RNTIs.
当每个PDCCH调度的PDSCH内容是不同PO的终端设备的标识时,不同的PO的信息可以通过不同的P-RNTI指示。When the PDSCH content scheduled by each PDCCH is the identity of the terminal device of a different PO, the information of different POs may be indicated by different P-RNTIs.
可选的,当多个PO或者多个分组中被呼叫的终端设备的数目较少时,可以将多个PO或者多个分组的PDSCH进行合并,采用一个PDCCH进行调度,多个PO或者多个UE分组使用相同的P-RNTI进行指示。Optionally, when the number of the called terminal devices in the multiple POs or the multiple packets is small, the multiple PDs or the PDSCHs of the multiple packets may be combined, and one PDCCH is used for scheduling, and multiple POs or multiples are used. UE packets are indicated using the same P-RNTI.
其中,上述N的值可以通过系统信息中配置,例如通过无线资源控制(Radio resource control,RRC)信令或MAC-CE信令配置,也可以在剩余RMSI或者SIB1中配置。也可以是在PDCCH中配置或者协议按照一定的规则规定。The value of the foregoing N may be configured in the system information, for example, by radio resource control (RRC) signaling or MAC-CE signaling, or may be configured in the remaining RMSI or SIB1. It may also be configured in the PDCCH or the protocol is specified according to certain rules.
由于寻呼消息的一个PO的持续时间比较长,导致UE盲检的次数比较大,为了降低盲检次数,需要网络设备配置各个PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源位置。Because the duration of one PO of the paging message is relatively long, the number of blind detections of the UE is relatively large. To reduce the number of blind detections, the network device needs to configure the control resource location of the paging message corresponding to each PO.
在NR当中,一个配置消息周期内可能会有多个PO。例如,一个同步信号段集合SS burst set周期内或者PBCH周期内可能会有多个PO,一个RMSI周期内或者一个SIB信息的周期内也可能有多个PO。In NR, there may be multiple POs in one configuration message period. For example, there may be multiple POs in a SS burst set period or a PBCH period in a synchronization signal segment set, and there may be multiple POs in one RMSI period or one SIB information period.
并且,发送寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源由基站配置。但寻呼消息的配置信息的周期与寻呼信息的传输周期可能不一致。因此需要在寻呼消息的配置信息中配置多个寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源。And, the time-frequency resource of the control resource that sends the paging message is configured by the base station. However, the period of the configuration information of the paging message may not coincide with the transmission period of the paging information. Therefore, it is necessary to configure time-frequency resources of control resources of a plurality of paging messages in the configuration information of the paging message.
其中,所述寻呼消息的控制资源包括但不限于:PO的物理下行控制信道(PDCCH),PO的下行控制信息(DCI)或PO的控制资源集合(CORESET)。所述寻呼消息的配置信息,是指配置寻呼消息的控制资源的信息,包括但不限于:RMSI,PBCH,DCI,RRC或媒体MAC-CE。The control resources of the paging message include, but are not limited to, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) of the PO, downlink control information (DCI) of the PO, or a control resource set (CORESET) of the PO. The configuration information of the paging message refers to information of a control resource for configuring a paging message, including but not limited to: RMSI, PBCH, DCI, RRC or media MAC-CE.
为了降低PO的配置信息的开销,可以将多个寻呼消息分为一组。一个组内的寻呼消息的控制资源一起被调度或配置。例如,可以由寻呼消息的配置信息配置一个大的时频资源块来实现。In order to reduce the overhead of the configuration information of the PO, multiple paging messages may be grouped into one group. Control resources for paging messages within a group are scheduled or configured together. For example, it can be implemented by configuring a large time-frequency resource block by the configuration information of the paging message.
网络设备可以向终端设备发送寻呼消息的配置信息,所述配置信息包括寻呼消息的一个控制资源块的信息,所述一个控制资源块由N个PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成;所述N为大于等于1的正整数;The network device may send configuration information of the paging message to the terminal device, where the configuration information includes information about a control resource block of the paging message, and the time when the one control resource block is controlled by the paging message corresponding to the N POs Frequency resource composition; the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
所述网络设备基于所述配置信息,向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息的控制资源。The network device sends a control resource of the paging message to the terminal device based on the configuration information.
可选的,所述N也可以为大于等于2的正整数。Optionally, the N may also be a positive integer greater than or equal to 2.
相应的,所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的所述配置信息,并接收所述网络设备发送的寻呼消息的控制资源。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the configuration information sent by the network device, and receives a control resource of a paging message sent by the network device.
可选的,还可以将该配置的时频资源块,例如一个控制资源块,均分为K等份。K为大于等于1的正整数。K的值可以与寻呼消息的数目相同。K的值也可以小于寻呼消息的数目,这样每一等份的时频资源可以包括一个或多个寻呼消息的控制资源。Optionally, the configured time-frequency resource block, for example, a control resource block, may be further divided into K equal parts. K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1. The value of K can be the same as the number of paging messages. The value of K may also be less than the number of paging messages, such that each aliquot of time-frequency resources may include control resources for one or more paging messages.
可选的,上述每一个寻呼消息组内的寻呼消息数目可以由网络设备(例如基站)配置,也可以由终端和网络设备预先约定。Optionally, the number of paging messages in each paging message group may be configured by a network device (for example, a base station), or may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device.
可选的,所述K等份的时频资源可以按照时间顺序优先,也可以按照频率顺序优先的方式进行放置或者分布。本申请实施例中,对所述K等份的时频资源的顺序不加限制,所述K等份的时频资源可以是顺序的也可以是倒序的,可以是终端和网络设备预先约定的,也可以是协议预先配置的。Optionally, the K-equal time-frequency resources may be prioritized in time order, or may be placed or distributed in a frequency-sequence-first manner. In the embodiment of the present application, the order of the time-frequency resources of the K equal parts is not limited, and the time-frequency resources of the K equal parts may be sequential or reversed, which may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device. It can also be pre-configured by the protocol.
可选的,所述时频资源份数(即所述K的值)可以由网络设备(例如基站)配置,也可以由终端和网络设备预先约定。所述时频资源份数(即所述K的值)还可以根据公共搜索空间资源大小或者配置的资源大小隐含指示。Optionally, the number of time-frequency resource shares (that is, the value of the K) may be configured by a network device (for example, a base station), or may be pre-agreed by the terminal and the network device. The number of time-frequency resource shares (ie, the value of the K) may also be implicitly indicated according to the size of the common search space resource or the configured resource size.
可选的,每组内不同的寻呼消息可以使用相同的DCI格式,也可以使用不同的DCI格式。对于使用不同DCI格式的寻呼消息,可以具有相同的比特数目。不同组内的寻呼消息数目可以是相等的,也可以是不相同的。Optionally, different paging messages in each group may use the same DCI format, or different DCI formats may be used. For paging messages using different DCI formats, there may be the same number of bits. The number of paging messages in different groups may be equal or different.
可选的,多个PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源可以位于一个公共搜索空间中,也可以在一个控制资源集合当中。Optionally, the control resources of the paging messages corresponding to the multiple POs may be located in a common search space or in a control resource set.
可选的,多个PO对应的寻呼消息的的控制资源(例如多个PO对应的寻呼消息的PDCCH)可以准同步(Quasi-Co-located,QCL)或关联到一个SS block上,或者QCL到一个特定的参考信号上。多个PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源(例如多个PO对应的寻呼消息的PDCCH)也可以QCL到不同的SS block上,或者QCL到不同的特定参考信号上。Optionally, a control resource of a paging message corresponding to multiple POs (for example, a PDCCH of a paging message corresponding to multiple POs) may be quasi-co-located (QCL) or associated with an SS block, or The QCL is on a specific reference signal. The control resources of the paging messages corresponding to the plurality of POs (for example, the PDCCHs of the paging messages corresponding to the plurality of POs) may also be QCL to different SS blocks or QCLs to different specific reference signals.
当终端设备进入一个DRX周期后,例如终端设备从DRX周期醒来之后,可以先接收基站发送的寻呼消息的配置信息,利用终端设备标识(UE ID)确定该终端设备所在的PO组,再利用UE ID和PO组的数目N确定该终端设备在PO组内所对应PO的控制资源位置,并通过解调控制资源,确定关于该终端设备的寻呼信息的位置。After the terminal device enters a DRX cycle, for example, after the terminal device wakes up from the DRX cycle, it may first receive configuration information of the paging message sent by the base station, and determine the PO group where the terminal device is located by using the terminal device identifier (UE ID), and then The location of the control resource of the PO corresponding to the terminal device in the PO group is determined by using the UE ID and the number N of the PO group, and the location of the paging information about the terminal device is determined by demodulating the control resource.
下面以DRX周期内为640ms,在这个DRX周期内有256个PO,RMSI的周期为20ms,不同的RMSI周期内的PO数目相等且为8个,每8个PO作为两个组配置,每一个组为四个PO为例,对终端设备确定控制信息和/或寻呼消息的方式进行说明。The following is 640ms in the DRX cycle, there are 256 POs in this DRX cycle, the RMSI cycle is 20ms, the number of POs in different RMSI cycles is equal and 8, and each 8 POs are configured as two groups, each The group uses four POs as an example to describe the manner in which the terminal device determines the control information and/or the paging message.
终端设备可以根据其设备标识(UE ID)对256进行求模,假设终端设备根据其UE ID对256求模后的结果是125,即UE ID mod 256=125。由于RMSI周期内的PO数为8个,根据求模的结果125可以确定该终端设备是在第15个RMSI周期的第5个PO上。该终端设备基于第15个RMSI周期的第5个PO,就能够确定该终端设备的PO所对应的寻呼消息控制资源位置。该终端设备确定时频资源位置之后,可以通过解调控制资源得到控制信息,并进一步根据控制信息获取寻呼信息。The terminal device can perform modulo 256 according to its device identifier (UE ID). It is assumed that the result of the terminal device modulo 256 according to its UE ID is 125, that is, UE ID mod 256=125. Since the number of POs in the RMSI period is eight, based on the result of the modulo 125, it can be determined that the terminal device is on the fifth PO of the 15th RMSI period. Based on the fifth PO of the 15th RMSI cycle, the terminal device can determine the paging message control resource location corresponding to the PO of the terminal device. After the terminal device determines the location of the time-frequency resource, the control information may be obtained by demodulating the control resource, and the paging information is further obtained according to the control information.
作为一个可选的实施例,终端设备的PO位置(例如PO的控制资源的时频资源的位置)的计算与配置信息的周期相关,即终端设备可以基于配置信息的周期计算PO的位置。所述的配置信息周期可以是SS burst set周期、RMSI的周期、RRC的周期、MAC-CE的周期或一个 SIB的周期。As an optional embodiment, the calculation of the PO location of the terminal device (for example, the location of the time-frequency resource of the control resource of the PO) is related to the period of the configuration information, that is, the terminal device can calculate the location of the PO based on the period of the configuration information. The configuration information period may be an SS burst set period, an RMSI period, an RRC period, a MAC-CE period, or a SIB period.
作为一个可选的实施例,所述PO的持续时间与一个SS burst set内的SS block数目或者SS block内的实际数目相关,所述SS block数目是指去除重复的SS block的SS block数目。所述PO的持续时间也可以与一个RMSI周期内RMSI的数目相关,或者与某一个系统信息块周期内该系统信息块(例如SIB1)的数目相关。所述的PO的持续时间是指一个PO内的时隙(slot)数目,或者子帧数目,或者小时隙(mini-slot)数目。所述的持续时间可以通过SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目隐含指示。所述PO的持续时间也可以是所述SS block数目、RMSI数目或SIB数目的整数倍或者分数倍。例如SS burst set内有16个SS block,PO的持续时间可以是16个子帧也可以是16个时隙slot,即PO的持续时间的子帧数目或者持续时间的slot数目或者小时隙(mini-slot)数目是所述SS burst set内SS block数目的倍数,或者是RMSI周期内RMSI的数目的倍数,也可以是其它特定值的倍数,例如该特定值是网络设备配置的,本申请实施例不限定具体倍数的实现方式。所述SS burst set内SS block数目的倍数可以通过RMSI、PBCH、RRC、MAC-CE或SIB等进行配置。例如通过RMSI配置的倍数为SS block数目的2倍,则PO的持续时间为32个子帧或者32个Slot。可选的,在PO的持续时间内,计算PO的持续时间时还可以跳过某些子帧、Slot或者mini-slot,例如跳过上行和下行切换的子帧等。或者配置信息配置单个QCL或者关联到不同SS block上或者不同特定参考信号上的寻呼信息,控制资源信息或者寻呼信息(可以去除跳过的子帧,slot,或者mini-slot)的单个持续时间段,与SS block数目或者RMSI数目相乘可以得到总的PO的持续时间。可选的,由于SS burst set内的不同的SS block可以进行分组,因此一个PO内的不同寻呼消息也可以分组,不同组内的寻呼消息持续时间可以有不同的配置。As an optional embodiment, the duration of the PO is related to the number of SS blocks in an SS burst set or the actual number in the SS block, and the number of SS blocks refers to the number of SS blocks in which the repeated SS blocks are removed. The duration of the PO may also be related to the number of RMSIs in one RMSI period or to the number of system information blocks (e.g., SIB1) within a certain system information block period. The duration of the PO refers to the number of slots in a PO, or the number of subframes, or the number of mini-slots. The duration may be implicitly indicated by the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs. The duration of the PO may also be an integer multiple or a fractional multiple of the number of SS blocks, the number of RMSIs, or the number of SIBs. For example, there are 16 SS blocks in the SS burst set. The duration of the PO can be 16 subframes or 16 slot slots, that is, the number of subframes of the duration of the PO or the number of slots of the duration or the minislot (mini- The number of slots is a multiple of the number of SS blocks in the SS burst set, or a multiple of the number of RMSIs in the RMSI period, and may be a multiple of other specific values, for example, the specific value is configured by the network device, and the embodiment of the present application The implementation of the specific multiple is not limited. A multiple of the number of SS blocks in the SS burst set may be configured by RMSI, PBCH, RRC, MAC-CE, or SIB. For example, if the multiple of the RMSI configuration is twice the number of SS blocks, the duration of the PO is 32 subframes or 32 slots. Optionally, during the duration of the PO, when calculating the duration of the PO, some subframes, slots, or mini-slots may be skipped, for example, skipping uplink and downlink switching subframes, and the like. Or the configuration information configures a single QCL or associated paging information on different SS blocks or on different specific reference signals, and controls a single continuation of resource information or paging information (which can remove skipped subframes, slots, or mini-slots) The time period, multiplied by the number of SS blocks or the number of RMSIs, gives the duration of the total PO. Optionally, different SS blocks in the SS burst set may be grouped, so different paging messages in one PO may also be grouped, and paging messages in different groups may have different configurations.
可选的,QCL或者关联到不同SS block上或者不同特定参考信号上的寻呼信息,控制资源信息或者寻呼信息可以在等间隔时间段(可以去除跳过的子帧,slot,或者mini-slot)的选择持续时间段进行发送。即将PO的持续时间等分为寻呼消息数目的时间段,每个寻呼时间段内发送一个寻呼消息。例如两倍SS block数目的情况下,QCL或者关联到第一个SS block上的寻呼消息,可以在前两个Slot或者前两个子帧上发送;QCL或者关联到第二个SS block上的寻呼消息可以在第3或4个子帧或slot上发送。可选的,相对于每一个等间隔时间段初始子帧或者初始slot或mini-slot的时间偏移,可以通过RMSI、PBCH、RRC、MAC-CE或SIB等进行配置。也可以通过盲检的方式,例如两倍SS block数目的情况下,QCL或者关联到第一个SS block上的寻呼消息可以在第一个Slot上发送,时间偏移为0;QCL或者关联到第二个SS block上的寻呼消息可以在第4个slot上发送,时间偏移为1,该时间偏移是相对于第3个slot的时间偏移。所述第3个slot的时间偏移,可以是第二个等间隔时间段内的第一个slot的时间偏移。Optionally, the QCL is associated with paging information on different SS blocks or on different specific reference signals, and the control resource information or paging information may be in an equally spaced time period (the skipped subframe, slot, or mini- may be removed). The slot is selected for the duration of the transmission. The duration of the PO is equally divided into time segments of the number of paging messages, and one paging message is sent during each paging time period. For example, if the number of SS blocks is doubled, the QCL or the paging message associated with the first SS block may be sent in the first two slots or the first two subframes; the QCL is associated with the second SS block. The paging message can be sent on the 3rd or 4th subframe or slot. Optionally, the time offset of the initial subframe or the initial slot or mini-slot may be configured by using RMSI, PBCH, RRC, MAC-CE, or SIB, etc., with respect to each equal interval period. It is also possible to pass a blind check, for example, in the case of twice the number of SS blocks, the QCL or the paging message associated with the first SS block can be sent on the first Slot with a time offset of 0; QCL or association The paging message to the second SS block can be sent on the fourth slot with a time offset of 1, which is the time offset relative to the third slot. The time offset of the third slot may be the time offset of the first slot in the second equally spaced time period.
在本申请实施例中,图1所示的无线通信系统100是多波束通信系统。网络设备101可以被配置有大规模的天线阵列,并利用波束成形技术控制天线阵列形成不同指向的波束。可理解的,一个终端处于某一个确定的位置时,对应落入一个或多个指向波束的发送范围内,该终端在该确定的位置时能够接收到使用上述一个或多个指向波束发送的信号。In the embodiment of the present application, the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 is a multi-beam communication system. The network device 101 can be configured with a large-scale antenna array and utilize beamforming techniques to control the antenna array to form beams of different orientations. It can be understood that when a terminal is in a certain determined position, corresponding to the transmission range of one or more pointing beams, the terminal can receive the signal transmitted by using the one or more pointing beams at the determined position. .
在寻呼过程中,由于网络设备101并不知道被寻呼的终端处于哪个位置,网络设备101需要使用多个不同指向的波束发送寻呼消息(paging),以覆盖整个小区107,确保被寻呼的终端接收到寻呼消息,该过程可称为波束扫描(Beam scanning)。覆盖整个小区的波束 扫描,造成资源的开销较大。In the paging process, since the network device 101 does not know which location the paged terminal is in, the network device 101 needs to use a plurality of different pointing beams to send a paging message to cover the entire cell 107, ensuring that it is sought. The calling terminal receives the paging message, and the process may be referred to as Beam scanning. The beam scanning covering the entire cell causes a large overhead of resources.
下面描述本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法,以解决全面波束扫描带来的资源开销大的问题。The signal transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described below to solve the problem of large resource overhead caused by full beam scanning.
本申请中,网络设备向多个终端发送寻呼指示(paging indication),该多个终端可以是一个跟踪区(tracking area identity,TA)范围内的多个终端,也可以是一个网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以是一个寻呼时机(paging occasion,PO)内的多个终端。接收到寻呼指示的多个终端都向网络设备发送上行信号,网络设备通过上行信号可获知该多个终端所在的波束,由于该多个终端中包括了被寻呼终端,网络设备利用该多个终端所在的波束进行波束扫描发送寻呼消息,可使得被寻呼终端接收到寻呼消息(paging)。本申请中,网络设备扫描的波束和网络设备对应的总的波束相比,数量减少很多,节省了波束扫描的开销。In this application, the network device sends a paging indication to a plurality of terminals, and the multiple terminals may be multiple terminals in a tracking area identity (TA) range, or may be a network device jurisdiction. The plurality of terminals in the terminal may also be a plurality of terminals in a paging occasion (PO). The plurality of terminals that receive the paging indication send the uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn the beam where the multiple terminals are located by using the uplink signal, and the network device utilizes the plurality of terminals because the paging terminal is included in the multiple terminals. The beam in which the terminal is located performs beam scanning to send a paging message, so that the paged terminal receives the paging message. In the present application, the number of beams scanned by the network device is greatly reduced compared with the total beam corresponding to the network device, which saves the overhead of beam scanning.
进一步的,本申请中,寻呼指示可以由网络设备配置,下面详细描述。Further, in the present application, the paging indication may be configured by a network device, which is described in detail below.
本申请中可将多个终端进行分组,该多个终端可以是一个跟踪区(tracking area identity,TA)范围内的多个终端,也可以是一个网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以是一个寻呼时机内的多个终端。网络设备可通过寻呼指示通知该多个终端被寻呼终端所在的组,如果一个终端所在的组包括被寻呼终端,那么该终端向网络设备发送上行信号,网络设备通过上行信号可获知被寻呼终端所在组内的所有终端所在的波束,并利用该波束进行波束扫描发送寻呼消息,可确保被寻呼终端接收到寻呼消息。在本申请中,寻呼指示的大小(即寻呼指示占用的数据比特数目),以及,寻呼指示关联的组的数目(即本申请中将多个终端进行分组的数目)是可以灵活配置的。In this application, a plurality of terminals may be grouped, and the multiple terminals may be multiple terminals within a tracking area identity (TA) range, or may be multiple terminals within the jurisdiction of a network device, and may also be It is a multiple terminal within a paging occasion. The network device may notify the group in which the plurality of terminals are paged by the paging indicator. If the group in which the terminal is located includes the paged terminal, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn by the uplink signal. Paging the beam of all the terminals in the group where the terminal is located, and using the beam to perform beam scanning to send a paging message, to ensure that the paged terminal receives the paging message. In the present application, the size of the paging indicator (ie, the number of data bits occupied by the paging indication), and the number of groups associated with the paging indication (ie, the number of groups of multiple terminals in the present application) can be flexibly configured. of.
本申请中,寻呼指示可以由网络设备通过配置信息灵活配置。In the present application, the paging indication can be flexibly configured by the network device through configuration information.
本申请中,寻呼指示可称为第一消息,配置信息可称为第一配置信息。In the present application, the paging indication may be referred to as a first message, and the configuration information may be referred to as first configuration information.
为了更好地了解本申请,首先介绍本申请涉及的几个基本概念:终端的非连续接收(discontinuous reception,DRX)周期、寻呼时机和同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SS block)。In order to better understand the present application, several basic concepts involved in the present application are first introduced: a discontinuous reception (DRX) period of a terminal, a paging occasion, and a synchronization signal block (SS block).
出于功耗的考虑,每个终端都有自己的DRX周期。DRX周期可以是默认的DRX周期,即一个小区内所有或者部分终端的DRX周期都相同,可由网络设备配置;DRX周期还可以是每个终端根据自身的情况上报的特定DRX周期。Each terminal has its own DRX cycle for power consumption considerations. The DRX period may be the default DRX period, that is, the DRX period of all or some of the terminals in a cell is the same, and may be configured by the network device; the DRX period may also be a specific DRX period reported by each terminal according to its own situation.
在一个DRX周期中,可包括多个PO,在本申请中,PO也可看作寻呼窗。In a DRX cycle, multiple POs may be included, and in the present application, POs may also be considered as paging windows.
PO是指可能包括寻呼消息的子帧。在寻呼过程中,终端仅需监听一个DRX周期内该终端对应的PO。可理解的,在寻呼过程中,多个终端可监听同一个PO。在本申请中,将监听同一个PO的多个终端称为该PO对应的终端。PO refers to a subframe that may include a paging message. During the paging process, the terminal only needs to listen to the PO corresponding to the terminal in a DRX cycle. Understandably, multiple terminals can listen to the same PO during the paging process. In the present application, a plurality of terminals that listen to the same PO are referred to as terminals corresponding to the PO.
同步信号块的数量会影响一个DRX周期内的PO数量,同步信号块的数量和PO数量之间呈现一种函数关系。例如,当一个同步信号段集合周期内的同步信号块的数目较多的时候,PO的数量会减少。The number of sync blocks affects the number of POs in a DRX cycle, and there is a functional relationship between the number of sync blocks and the number of POs. For example, when the number of sync signal blocks in a set period of a sync signal segment is large, the number of POs is reduced.
DRX周期的长度也可能会影响该DRX周期内的PO数量。例如,当该DRX周期的长度越长时,该DRX周期内的PO数量越多。The length of the DRX cycle may also affect the number of POs in the DRX cycle. For example, the longer the length of the DRX cycle, the greater the number of POs in the DRX cycle.
下面介绍本申请涉及的关键技术点。The key technical points involved in this application are described below.
(一)终端的分组方式(1) Grouping method of terminals
本申请中,可以将多个终端进行分组。该多个终端可以是一个跟踪区范围内的多个终端,也可以是一个网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以是一个PO内的多个终端。In this application, multiple terminals can be grouped. The plurality of terminals may be multiple terminals within a tracking area, or may be multiple terminals within the jurisdiction of one network device, or may be multiple terminals within one PO.
将多个终端分组后,每个终端可计算所在的组。终端所在的组可以根据以下至少一项信息确定:分组的组数目K、第一消息的数据比特数目、第一消息关联的组的数目、第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、终端的标识、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特在完整终端标识中的位置、PO的数量、同步信息块的数量或者DRX周期的长度。在本申请中,上述至少一项信息中的部分或者全部可以由标准协议预先定义。终端根据上述至少一项确定所在的组的方式有多种,可以由标准协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备和终端约定。After grouping multiple terminals, each terminal can calculate the group in which it is located. The group in which the terminal is located may be determined according to at least one of the following: the number of groups K of the packet, the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and the terminal. The identifier, the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the complete terminal identification, the number of POs, the number of synchronization information blocks, or the length of the DRX cycle. In the present application, some or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol. There are multiple ways for the terminal to determine the group according to the foregoing at least one item, which may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
其中,多个终端分组后的组数目K可以根据第一消息的数据比特数目、第一消息关联的组的数目、第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目中的任意一项或多项确定,可参考后续关键技术点(四)、(五)中的相关描述,在此不赘述。The number K of the group after the multiple terminals are grouped may be any one or more of the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, and the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message. For the determination, refer to the related descriptions in the following key technical points (4) and (5), and will not be described here.
下面举例说明终端如何根据上述至少一项信息确定所在的组。The following example illustrates how the terminal determines the group in which it is based on at least one of the above information.
在可选实施例中,可通过以下两种计算策略来计算终端所在的组。In an alternative embodiment, the group in which the terminal is located can be calculated by the following two computing strategies.
第一种计算策略,通过公式
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000003
来计算终端所在的组。
The first calculation strategy, through the formula
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000003
To calculate the group in which the terminal is located.
其中,UEID为终端标识。终端标识可以唯一确定一个终端。终端标识可以是国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identification number,IMSI)、SAE临时移动标识(SAE temporary mobile station identifier,S-TMSI)等可确定唯一终端的标识。The UEID is a terminal identifier. The terminal identifier can uniquely identify a terminal. The terminal identifier may be an international mobile subscriber identification number (IMSI), a SAE temporary mobile station identifier (S-TMSI), or the like, which may determine the identity of the unique terminal.
其中,N可以为常数,可以根据PO的数量、DRX周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量中的至少一项确定。例如,N可以是DRX周期内包括的PO数目或者寻呼窗数目,还可以是同步信号块的数目等。Where N may be a constant, and may be determined according to at least one of the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks. For example, N may be the number of POs or the number of paging windows included in the DRX cycle, and may also be the number of synchronization signal blocks, and the like.
其中,n表示终端属于K组中的第n组。Where n indicates that the terminal belongs to the nth group in the K group.
第二种计算策略,通过公式n=(用于计算分组信息的数据比特)mod K来计算终端所在的组。The second calculation strategy calculates the group in which the terminal is located by the formula n=(the data bit used to calculate the grouping information) mod K.
其中,用于计算分组信息的数据比特为终端标识中的部分数据比特。用于计算分组信息的数据比特通过以下两个因素选取:用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置,用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目。Wherein, the data bits used to calculate the group information are part of the data bits in the terminal identifier. The data bits used to calculate the packet information are selected by two factors: the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, and the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information.
在可选实施例中,终端标识的一部分数据比特可用于计算终端对应的PO,终端标识中去除计算终端对应的PO的数据比特后,剩余的数据比特可用于计算终端所在的组。由于,一个PO可对应有多个终端,相当于通过PO将终端进行分类,本申请中,可以同时配置寻呼过程中终端的分组,以及,终端对应的PO。In an optional embodiment, a part of the data bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate the PO corresponding to the terminal. After the data bits of the PO corresponding to the computing terminal are removed from the terminal identifier, the remaining data bits may be used to calculate the group in which the terminal is located. Since one PO can correspond to multiple terminals, the terminal is classified by the PO. In this application, the grouping of the terminal in the paging process and the PO corresponding to the terminal can be configured at the same time.
本申请中,可通过以下方式确定上述两个因素:第一个因素,即用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置,可以根据上述的常数N确定;第二个因素,即用于计算分组信息的数据比特的数目,可以根据分组的组数目K确定。In the present application, the above two factors can be determined by the following factors: the first factor, that is, the position of the data bit used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, which can be determined according to the above constant N; the second factor, that is, The number of data bits for calculating the packet information can be determined according to the number of groups K of the packets.
举例说明,参见图6,图6示出了一种可能的用于计算分组信息的数据比特的数目和在终端标识中的位置示意图。其中,终端的完整标识通过二进制表示时,终端标识的最低log 2N个比特位可用于计算终端对应的PO或者寻呼窗,其中N为PO的数目。用于计算分组信息的数据比特为:和所述最低的log 2N个比特位相邻的
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000004
个比特位。
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000005
表示对log 2K向上取整。
For example, referring to FIG. 6, FIG. 6 shows a possible schematic diagram of the number of data bits used to calculate packet information and the location in the terminal identification. The minimum log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate the PO or paging window corresponding to the terminal, where N is the number of POs. The data bits used to calculate the packet information are: adjacent to the lowest log 2 N bits
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000004
Bits.
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000005
Indicates that the log 2 K is rounded up.
上述举例仅为示例性解释,具体实现中,根据组数目K、常数N确定的用于计算分组信息的数据比特可以和上述示例中不同,用于计算分组信息的数据比特的确定方式可以有多种。用于计算分组信息的数据比特的确定方式可以由网络设备确定,也可以由终端确定,也可以由网络设备和终端之间约定,还可以由标准协议预先定义。The above examples are merely exemplary explanations. In a specific implementation, the data bits for calculating the group information determined according to the group number K and the constant N may be different from the above examples, and the data bits for calculating the group information may be determined in a plurality of manners. Kind. The manner of determining the data bits used to calculate the packet information may be determined by the network device, determined by the terminal, or agreed between the network device and the terminal, or may be predefined by a standard protocol.
可理解的,上述的两种计算策略仅为示例性解释。不限于上述的计算策略,具体实现中,还可以上述的至少一项,使用其他的计算策略来计算终端所在的组,本申请不做任何限制。本申请中,具体的计算策略可由标准协议预先定义,或者,由网络设备和终端之间约定。It can be understood that the above two calculation strategies are merely exemplary explanations. It is not limited to the above-mentioned calculation strategy. In a specific implementation, at least one of the foregoing may be used to calculate a group in which the terminal is located, and the application does not impose any limitation. In the present application, a specific calculation strategy may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed between a network device and a terminal.
(二)终端的截断标识(2) The truncated identification of the terminal
和上述的用于计算分组信息的数据比特类似,终端的截断标识通过截取该终端标识的部分片段得到。由于截断标识是终端标识的一部分,截断标识不具有唯一性,即,多个终端的截断标识可以相同,一个截断标识可对应多个终端。Similar to the above-described data bits for calculating packet information, the truncation identifier of the terminal is obtained by intercepting a partial segment of the terminal identification. Since the truncation identifier is a part of the terminal identifier, the truncation identifier is not unique, that is, the truncation identifiers of the multiple terminals may be the same, and one truncation identifier may correspond to the plurality of terminals.
在本申请中,可根据以下至少一项信息确定终端的截断标识:截断标识的数据比特数目、截断标识在终端标识中的位置、终端的标识、PO的数量、同步信号块的数量或者DRX周期的长度。在本申请中,上述至少一项信息中的部分或者全部可以由标准协议预先定义,或者,由网络设备和终端预先约定。根据上述至少一项信息确定终端的截断标识的方式有多种,可以由标准协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备和终端约定。In the present application, the truncated identifier of the terminal may be determined according to at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the truncated identifier, the location of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier, the identifier of the terminal, the number of POs, the number of synchronization signal blocks, or the DRX cycle. length. In the present application, part or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol or pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal. The manner of determining the truncated identifier of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be multiple, may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
下面举例说明如何根据上述的至少一项信息确定终端的截断标识。The following example illustrates how to determine the truncation identifier of the terminal according to at least one piece of information described above.
和上述的用于计算分组信息的数据比特类似,终端的截断标识可以通过以下两个因素选取:截断标识的数据比特数目,截断标识在终端标识中的位置。Similar to the above-mentioned data bits for calculating group information, the truncation identifier of the terminal can be selected by the following two factors: truncating the number of data bits of the identifier, and truncating the position of the identifier in the terminal identifier.
本申请中,可以根据以下方式确定上述两个因素:第一个因素,即截断标识的数据比特数目,可以根据虚警概率确定,或者根据终端的数量确定;第二个因素,即截断标识在终端标识中的位置,可以根据N确定,N为常数,N可通过PO的数量、DRX的长度或者同步信号块的数量中的至少一项确定。In the present application, the above two factors may be determined according to the following manner: the first factor, that is, the number of data bits of the truncated identifier, may be determined according to the false alarm probability, or determined according to the number of terminals; the second factor, that is, the truncated identifier is The location in the terminal identification may be determined according to N, where N is a constant, and N may be determined by at least one of the number of POs, the length of DRX, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
其中,终端向网络设备发送了上行信号,以便网络设备向该终端发送寻呼消息,但是该终端并不是被寻呼终端的情况,可称为虚警。截断标识的数据比特数目和虚警概率相关时,一种可能的实施方式是,当虚警概率较高时,为了降低虚警概率,可增加截断标识的数据比特数目。The terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device, so that the network device sends a paging message to the terminal, but the terminal is not the paged terminal, and may be referred to as a false alarm. When the number of data bits of the truncated identifier is related to the false alarm probability, a possible implementation manner is to increase the number of data bits of the truncated identifier in order to reduce the false alarm probability when the false alarm probability is high.
其中,当截断标识的数据比特数目和终端的数量相关时,一种可能的实施方式是,当终端数量较多时,减少截断标识的数据比特数目。通过这种实施方式,可以减少网络设备在寻呼过程中的信令开销。Wherein, when the number of data bits of the truncated identifier is related to the number of terminals, a possible implementation manner is to reduce the number of data bits of the truncated identifier when the number of terminals is large. With this implementation, the signaling overhead of the network device during the paging process can be reduced.
举例说明,参见图6,图6示出了一种可能的终端的截断标识的数据比特的数目和截断标识在终端标识中的位置示意图。其中,终端的完整标识通过二进制表示时,该终端的截断标识可占用M个比特位,且,该终端的截断标识和该终端标识的最低的log 2N个比特位相邻。其中,该终端标识的最低的log 2N个比特位可用于计算终端对应的PO或者寻呼窗。 For example, referring to FIG. 6, FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of the number of data bits of the truncated identifier of a possible terminal and the location of the truncated identifier in the terminal identifier. When the complete identifier of the terminal is represented by binary, the truncated identifier of the terminal may occupy M bits, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is adjacent to the lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier. The lowest log 2 N bits of the terminal identifier may be used to calculate a PO or a paging window corresponding to the terminal.
不限于上述举例中的截断标识可能的数据比特数目和位置,终端的截断标识还可以为:该终端标识的S-TMSI中的最高或者最低M个比特位,该终端标识的最低的log 2N个比特位相邻的连续或非连续的M个比特位。可选的,终端截断标识的起始位置或结束位置还可以 和终端标识中用于计算PO的比特位相邻。其中,M和用于计算PO的比特位可以由标准协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备和终端约定。 The truncated identifier of the terminal may be: the highest or lowest M bits in the S-TMSI identified by the terminal, and the lowest log 2 N of the terminal identifier, which is not limited to the number and location of possible data bits of the truncated identifier in the above example. Successive or non-contiguous M bits of adjacent bits. Optionally, the start position or the end position of the terminal truncation identifier may also be adjacent to the bit used in the terminal identifier for calculating the PO. Wherein, M and the bit used to calculate the PO may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
上述举例仅为示例性解释,具体实现中,根据上述的至少一项信息确定终端的截断标识的方式可以和上述示例中不同,确定截断标识的方式可以有多种。确定截断标识的方式可以由网络设备确定,也可以由终端确定,也可以由网络设备和终端之间约定,还可以由标准协议预先定义。The foregoing example is only an exemplary explanation. In a specific implementation, the manner of determining the truncated identifier of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be different from the foregoing example, and the manner for determining the truncated identifier may be multiple. The manner of determining the truncated identifier may be determined by the network device, determined by the terminal, or agreed between the network device and the terminal, or may be predefined by a standard protocol.
本申请中,终端截断标识的选取可以是基于区域的,也可以是基于PO的,还可以是同时基于区域和PO的,下面详细说明。In the present application, the selection of the terminal truncation identifier may be based on a region, or may be based on a PO, or may be based on both a region and a PO, as described in detail below.
在可选实施例中,终端截断标识基于区域。例如,网络设备的管辖范围内包括多个子区域,终端的截断标识与该终端所在的子区域相关。举例说明,位于子区域1的终端的上述两个因素相同,位于子区域2的终端的上述两个因素相同。In an alternative embodiment, the terminal truncation identifier is based on a region. For example, the jurisdiction of the network device includes multiple sub-areas, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is related to the sub-area in which the terminal is located. For example, the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 1 are the same, and the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 2 are the same.
在可选实施例中,终端截断标识基于PO。例如,不同PO对应的终端选取截断标识时的两个因素可以不同。举例说明,在一个DRX周期中,第1个PO对应的多个终端的上述两个因素可为:占用K1个相邻的比特位,截断标识的起始位置为终端标识的起始位置;第2个PO对应的多个终端的上述两个因素可为:占用K2个相邻的比特位,截断标识的结束位置为终端标识的结束位置。In an alternative embodiment, the terminal truncation identifier is based on a PO. For example, two factors when a terminal corresponding to different POs selects a truncation identifier may be different. For example, in a DRX cycle, the foregoing two factors of the multiple terminals corresponding to the first PO may be: occupying K1 adjacent bits, and the starting position of the truncated identifier is the starting position of the terminal identifier; The above two factors of the multiple terminals corresponding to the two POs may be: occupying K2 adjacent bits, and the ending position of the truncated identifier is the ending position of the terminal identifier.
在可选实施例中,终端截断标识同时基于区域和PO。例如,网络设备的管辖范围内包括多个子区域,终端的截断标识和以下两项相关:该终端所在的子区域,和,该终端对应的PO。举例说明,位于子区域1且第1个PO对应的多个终端的上述两个因素相同;位于子区域1且第2个PO对应的多个终端的上述两个因素相同。In an alternative embodiment, the terminal truncation identification is based on both the zone and the PO. For example, the jurisdiction of the network device includes multiple sub-areas, and the truncated identifier of the terminal is related to the following two sub-areas in which the terminal is located, and the PO corresponding to the terminal. For example, the two factors of the plurality of terminals located in the sub-area 1 and corresponding to the first PO are the same; the two factors located in the sub-area 1 and the plurality of terminals corresponding to the second PO are the same.
(三)寻呼过程中终端的索引(paging index)(3) The index of the terminal in the paging process (paging index)
在寻呼过程中,可以使用终端的索引进行寻呼。终端的索引不具有唯一性,即,多个终端的索引可能相同,一个索引可对应多个终端。During the paging process, the index of the terminal can be used for paging. The index of the terminal is not unique, that is, the indexes of multiple terminals may be the same, and one index may correspond to multiple terminals.
本申请中,终端的索引可以是完整的终端标识,也可以是终端标识的一部分,还可以仅仅为一个索引值,下面分情况说明。In this application, the index of the terminal may be a complete terminal identifier, or may be part of the terminal identifier, or may be only an index value, which is described below.
第一种情况,当终端的索引为完整的终端标识时,一个索引对应一个终端。In the first case, when the index of the terminal is a complete terminal identifier, one index corresponds to one terminal.
第二种情况,当终端的索引为终端标识的一部分时,和上述终端的截断标识相同,终端索引通过截取终端标识的部分片段得到,终端的索引可根据以下至少一项信息确定:索引的长度、索引在终端标识中的位置、终端的标识、PO的数量、同步信号块的数量或者DRX周期的长度。在本申请中,上述至少一项信息中的部分或者全部可以由标准协议预先定义,或者,由网络设备和终端预先约定。根据上述至少一项信息确定终端的索引的方式有多种,可以由标准协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备和终端约定。In the second case, when the index of the terminal is part of the terminal identifier, and the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same, the terminal index is obtained by intercepting the partial identifier of the terminal identifier, and the index of the terminal may be determined according to at least one of the following information: length of the index The location of the index in the terminal identifier, the identifier of the terminal, the number of POs, the number of synchronization signal blocks, or the length of the DRX cycle. In the present application, part or all of the above at least one piece of information may be predefined by a standard protocol or pre-agreed by the network device and the terminal. The manner of determining the index of the terminal according to the at least one piece of information may be multiple, may be predefined by a standard protocol, or may be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
下面举例说明如何根据上述的至少一项信息确定终端索引。The following example illustrates how to determine the terminal index based on at least one of the above information.
在可选实施例中,和上述截断标识类似,终端索引可以根据以下因素选取:终端索引的数据比特数目,终端索引在终端标识中的位置。上述两个因素的确定方式可参照关键技术点(二)中的相关描述,在此不赘述。In an alternative embodiment, similar to the truncation identifier described above, the terminal index may be selected according to the following factors: the number of data bits of the terminal index, and the location of the terminal index in the terminal identifier. The determination of the above two factors can be referred to the relevant description in the key technical point (2), and will not be described here.
第三种情况,终端的索引仅仅为一个索引值。In the third case, the index of the terminal is only one index value.
本申请中,对于上述第一种情况,一个索引对应一个终端,即,终端的索引基于终端 标识。In the present application, for the first case, one index corresponds to one terminal, that is, the index of the terminal is based on the terminal identifier.
本申请中,对于上述第二种情况和第三种情况,和上述截断标识类似,终端的索引可以是基于区域的,也可以是基于PO的,还可以是同时基于区域和PO的,下面详细说明。In the present application, for the second case and the third case, similar to the truncated identifier, the index of the terminal may be based on the area, or may be based on the PO, or may be based on the area and the PO at the same time. Description.
在可选实施例中,终端的索引基于区域。例如,网络设备的管辖范围内包括多个子区域,终端的索引与该终端所在的子区域相关。举例说明,对应上述第二种情况,位于子区域1的终端的上述两个因素相同,位于子区域2的终端的上述两个因素相同。又举例说明,对应于上述第三种情况,位于子区域1的终端索引值相同,位于子区域2的终端索引值相同。In an alternative embodiment, the index of the terminal is based on the region. For example, a network device includes a plurality of sub-areas within its jurisdiction, and an index of the terminal is related to a sub-area in which the terminal is located. For example, corresponding to the second case, the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 1 are the same, and the above two factors of the terminal located in the sub-area 2 are the same. For example, corresponding to the third case, the terminal index values in the sub-area 1 are the same, and the terminal index values in the sub-area 2 are the same.
在可选实施例中,终端的索引基于PO。举例说明,对应上述第二种情况,在一个DRX周期中,第1个PO对应的终端的上述的两个因素相同;第2个PO对应的终端的上述两个因素相同。又举例说明,对应上述第三种情况,在一个DRX周期中,第1个PO对应的终端索引值相同;第2个PO对应的终端索引值相同。In an alternative embodiment, the index of the terminal is based on the PO. For example, in the second case, in the DRX cycle, the two factors of the terminal corresponding to the first PO are the same; the two factors of the terminal corresponding to the second PO are the same. For example, in the third case, the terminal index values corresponding to the first PO are the same in one DRX cycle, and the terminal index values corresponding to the second PO are the same.
在可选实施例中,终端的索引同时基于区域和PO。举例说明,网络设备的管辖范围内包括多个子区域,对应于上述第二种情况,位于子区域1且第1个PO对应的多个终端的上述两个因素相同,位于子区域2且第2个PO对应的多个终端的上述两个因素相同。又举例说明,网络设备的管辖范围内包括多个子区域,对应于上述第三种情况,位于子区域1且第1个PO对应的多个终端的索引值相同,位于子区域2且第2个PO对应的多个终端的索引值相同。In an alternative embodiment, the index of the terminal is based on both the region and the PO. For example, the plurality of sub-areas are included in the jurisdiction of the network device, and the two factors corresponding to the second case are located in the sub-area 1 and the plurality of terminals corresponding to the first PO are the same, and are located in the sub-area 2 and the second The above two factors of the plurality of terminals corresponding to the POs are the same. For example, the plurality of sub-areas are included in the jurisdiction of the network device, and the index values of the plurality of terminals corresponding to the first PO are the same in the sub-area 1 and are located in the sub-area 2 and the second one. The index values of the plurality of terminals corresponding to the PO are the same.
(四)第一消息的实现(4) Implementation of the first message
本申请中,第一消息即寻呼指示。第一消息可以通过以下三种方式实现。In the present application, the first message is a paging indication. The first message can be implemented in the following three ways.
第一种实现方式,第一消息可用于指示各个组是否包括被寻呼终端,即,第一消息可用于指示终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。In a first implementation manner, the first message may be used to indicate whether each group includes a paged terminal, that is, the first message may be used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
在第一种实现方式中,可通过第一消息的各个比特位的取值可指示各个组是否有终端被寻呼。其中,多少个比特位用于指示一个组,可以由网络设备和终端之间约定,也可以由标准协议预先定义。In a first implementation manner, the value of each bit of the first message may indicate whether each group has a terminal being paged. Among them, how many bits are used to indicate a group, which can be agreed between the network device and the terminal, or can be predefined by a standard protocol.
在可选实施例中,这里,第一消息指示的各个组可以是一个跟踪区范围内的多个终端进行分组得到的各个组,也可以是一个网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端进行分组得到的各个组,还可以是一个PO内的多个终端进行分组得到的各个组。In an optional embodiment, each group indicated by the first message may be a group obtained by grouping multiple terminals in a tracking area, or may be grouped by multiple terminals within a network device jurisdiction. Each group may also be a group obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals in one PO.
举例说明,在一个具体的实施例中,针对一个PO内的多个终端分组。第一消息包括16个比特位,各个比特位的取值为1100011000110000。其中,一个比特位表示一组,各个比特位中取值“1”表示对应的组内有终端被寻呼,取值“0”表示对应的组内没有终端被寻呼。若将该PO内的多个终端分组的组数目为16,那么,该第一消息指示了第1、2、6、7、11、12组内有终端被寻呼,即,第1、2、6、7、11、12组的终端中都包含有被寻呼终端。可理解的,若将该PO内的多个终端分组的组数目为4,那么四个比特位代表一个组,“1100”“0110”“0011”“0000”分别对应第1、2、3、4组,四个比特位取何值时代表对应的组内有终端被寻呼可由标准协议预先定义。By way of example, in one particular embodiment, multiple terminals within a PO are grouped. The first message includes 16 bits, and each bit has a value of 1100011000110000. Wherein, one bit represents a group, and a value of "1" in each bit indicates that a terminal in the corresponding group is paged, and a value of "0" indicates that no terminal in the corresponding group is paged. If the number of groups of the plurality of terminal groups in the PO is 16, the first message indicates that the terminals in the first, second, sixth, seventh, eleventh, and twelveth groups are paged, that is, the first and second ends. The terminals of groups 6, 6, 11, and 12 all include a paged terminal. It can be understood that if the number of groups of the plurality of terminal groups in the PO is 4, the four bits represent one group, and "1100", "0110", "0011" and "0000" correspond to the first, second, third, respectively. 4 groups, when the value of four bits is taken, it means that the terminal in the corresponding group is paged and can be pre-defined by the standard protocol.
在另一可选实施例中,这里,第一消息指示的各个组可以是将多个跟踪区范围内的包括的多个终端分别进行分组,得到的各个组;也可以是将多个网络设备管辖范围内包括的多个终端分别进行分组,得到的各个组;还可以是将多个寻呼时机内包括的多个终端分别 进行分组,得到的各个组。在这种情况下,针对每个跟踪区、每个网络设备管辖范围、每个PO内的多个终端分组的数目可以不同,即,在第一消息中,用于指示每个跟踪区、每个网络设备管辖范围、每个PO内的各组是否包括被寻呼终端的数据比特数目可以不同。In another optional embodiment, the respective groups indicated by the first message may be groups obtained by grouping a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of tracking areas, respectively, or may be multiple network devices. Each of the plurality of terminals included in the jurisdiction is grouped and obtained, and each of the plurality of terminals included in the plurality of paging occasions is separately grouped. In this case, the number of multiple terminal groups within each PO may be different for each tracking area, each network device jurisdiction, that is, in the first message, for indicating each tracking area, each The number of data bits in the network device jurisdiction, whether each group in each PO includes the paged terminal may be different.
举例说明,在一个具体的实施例中,针对一个DRX周期内的两个PO内包括的多个终端分组。第一个PO内的多个终端分为10组,第二个PO内的多个终端分为6组。第一消息包括16个比特位,前10个比特位用于指示第一个PO内的各个组,后6个比特位用于指示第二个PO内的各个组。各个比特位的取值为1100011000110000。其中,一个比特位表示一组,各个比特位中取值“1”表示对应的组内有终端被寻呼,取值“0”表示对应的组内没有终端被寻呼。那么,该第一消息可用于指示第一个PO内的第1、2、6、7组终端内包括被寻呼终端,第二个PO内的第1、2组终端内包括被寻呼终端。By way of example, in one particular embodiment, multiple terminal groups included within two POs within one DRX cycle are grouped. The plurality of terminals in the first PO are divided into 10 groups, and the plurality of terminals in the second PO are divided into 6 groups. The first message includes 16 bits, the first 10 bits are used to indicate each group in the first PO, and the last 6 bits are used to indicate each group in the second PO. The value of each bit is 1100011000110000. Wherein, one bit represents a group, and a value of "1" in each bit indicates that a terminal in the corresponding group is paged, and a value of "0" indicates that no terminal in the corresponding group is paged. Then, the first message is used to indicate that the first, second, sixth, and seventh groups of terminals in the first PO include the paged terminal, and the first and second groups of terminals in the second PO include the paged terminal. .
可理解的,将多个跟踪区范围内的包括的多个终端进行分组,以及,将多个网络设备管辖范围内包括的多个终端进行分组的情况下,第一消息的实现和上述具体实施例类似,在此不赘述。It can be understood that, when a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of tracking areas are grouped, and a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of network device jurisdictions are grouped, the implementation of the first message and the foregoing specific implementation The example is similar and will not be described here.
第二种实现方式中,第一消息可包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识。In a second implementation manner, the first message may include a truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal.
这里,截断标识可参照关键技术点(二)中的相关描述。Here, the truncation identifier can refer to the related description in the key technical point (2).
举例说明,若在寻呼过程中,寻呼消息的对象为终端1,终端1的截断标识为“0011”。那么第一消息使用4个比特位取值“0011”,以指示截断标识为“0011”的终端可能被寻呼。For example, if the object of the paging message is the terminal 1 during the paging process, the truncation identifier of the terminal 1 is "0011". Then the first message uses the value of 4 bits to "0011" to indicate that the terminal with the truncated identifier "0011" may be paged.
第三种实现方式中,第一消息可包括至少一个被寻呼终端的索引。In a third implementation manner, the first message may include an index of at least one paged terminal.
这里,终端的索引可参照关键技术点(三)中的相关描述。Here, the index of the terminal can refer to the related description in the key technology point (3).
举例说明,当终端索引为终端标识的一部分时,第一消息可包括至少一个被寻呼终端的部分标识,当终端索引仅仅是一个索引值时,第一消息可包括至少一个被寻呼终端的索引值。For example, when the terminal index is part of the terminal identifier, the first message may include a partial identifier of the at least one paged terminal, and when the terminal index is only an index value, the first message may include at least one paged terminal. Index value.
在上述三种实现方式中,第一消息可通过寻呼信息的物理下行共享信道(physical downlink sharedchannel,PDSCH)或者寻呼信息的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)发送,或者通过控制资源集合(CORESET)发送。In the foregoing three implementation manners, the first message may be sent by using a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) of the paging information or a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) of the paging information, or by using a control The resource collection (CORESET) is sent.
(五)第一配置信息的实现(5) Implementation of the first configuration information
本申请中,第一配置信息可以通过以下三种方式实现。In this application, the first configuration information can be implemented in the following three manners.
第一种实现方式,第一配置信息用于终端确定终端所在的组,第一配置信息可包括以下至少一项信息:第一消息的数据比特数目、第一消息关联的组的数目、第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置、PO的数量、DRX周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。这里的第一消息对应于上述关键技术点(四)中第一消息的第一种实现方式。In a first implementation, the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine the group in which the terminal is located, and the first configuration information may include at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, and the first The number of data bits indicating each group in the message, the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information, the position of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks . The first message here corresponds to the first implementation of the first message in the above-mentioned key technology point (4).
在可选实施例中,当第一配置信息用于配置第一消息的数据比特数目时,可以有以下两种配置方案。In an optional embodiment, when the first configuration information is used to configure the number of data bits of the first message, the following two configuration schemes are available.
第一种配置方案,通过各个比特表示的数字直接指示。例如,第一配置信息可通过4个比特位指示第一消息的数据比特数目,4个比特位的取值可以是0001-1111中的任意一种,可分别指示数字1-16,即第一消息的数据比特数目为1-16中的任意一个。The first configuration scheme is directly indicated by the number represented by each bit. For example, the first configuration information may indicate the number of data bits of the first message by using 4 bits, and the value of the 4 bits may be any one of 0001-1111, and may respectively indicate the numbers 1-16, that is, the first The number of data bits of the message is any one of 1-16.
第二种配置方案,通过各个比特标识的数字指示第一消息的配置方案。例如,预先定义第一消息有四种配置方案,分别对应的第一消息的数据比特数目为:8、10、12或者18。 第一配置信息可通过2个比特指示配置方案,2个比特的取值为00时,指示第一种配置方案,即第一消息的数据比特数目为8,2个比特的取值为01时,指示第二种配置方案,即第一消息的数据比特数目为10,以此类推。The second configuration scheme indicates the configuration scheme of the first message by the number of each bit identifier. For example, there are four configuration schemes for predefining the first message, and the number of data bits of the corresponding first message is: 8, 10, 12 or 18. The first configuration information may indicate the configuration scheme by using two bits. When the value of the two bits is 00, the first configuration scheme is indicated, that is, the number of data bits of the first message is 8, and the value of the two bits is 01. Indicates a second configuration scheme, that is, the number of data bits of the first message is 10, and so on.
不限于上述两种配置方案,第一配置信息还可通过其他的形式来配置第一消息的数据比特数目,本申请不做限制。The first configuration information may be configured by other forms to configure the number of data bits of the first message, which is not limited in this application.
在本申请中,第一消息关联的组数目就是终端分组的组数目K。第一消息关联的组数目有两种情况,下面详细描述。In the present application, the number of groups associated with the first message is the number K of groups of terminal packets. There are two cases of the number of groups associated with the first message, which are described in detail below.
第一种情况,第一消息关联的组的数目可以是一个跟踪区范围内的多个终端进行分组的组数目,也可以是一个网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端进行分组的组数目,还可以是一个PO内的多个终端进行分组的组数目。In the first case, the number of groups associated with the first message may be the number of groups in which multiple terminals in a tracking area are grouped, or may be the number of groups in which multiple terminals in a network device jurisdiction are grouped. It can be the number of groups that are grouped by multiple terminals within one PO.
在上述第一种情况中,第一配置信息在配置第一消息关联的组的数目时,可以和当前处于一个跟踪区范围内的终端的总数目相关,也可以和当前处于一个网络设备管辖范围内的终端的总数目相关,还可以和当前一个PO内的终端的总数目相关。一种可能的方式是,当一个跟踪区范围内的终端的总数目越多时,配置的第一消息关联的组的数目越多;当一个网络设备管辖范围内的终端的总数目越多时,配置的第一消息关联的组的数目越多;当一个PO对应的终端的总数目越多时,配置的第一消息关联的组的数目越多。另一种可能的方式是,当一个跟踪区范围内的被寻呼终端的数目越多时,配置的第一消息关联的组的数目越多;当一个网络设备管辖范围内的被寻呼终端的数目越多时,配置的第一消息关联的组的数目越多;当一个PO对应的被寻呼终端的数目越多时,配置的第一消息关联的组的数目越多。In the first case, the first configuration information may be related to the total number of terminals currently in the range of one tracking area when configuring the number of groups associated with the first message, or may be in the jurisdiction of a network device. The total number of terminals within the correlation is also related to the total number of terminals in the current PO. One possible way is that the more the total number of terminals in a tracking area is, the more the number of groups associated with the configured first message; the more the total number of terminals within the jurisdiction of a network device, the more the configuration The greater the number of groups associated with the first message, the greater the number of groups associated with the configured first message when the total number of terminals corresponding to one PO is greater. Another possible way is that the more the number of paging terminals in a tracking area is, the more the number of groups associated with the configured first message; when the paging terminal in the jurisdiction of a network device The greater the number, the greater the number of groups associated with the configured first message; the greater the number of paging terminals corresponding to a PO, the greater the number of groups associated with the configured first message.
在上述第一种情况中,当第一配置信息配置了第一消息的数据比特数目,或者,第一消息关联的组的数目中的任意一项时,另外一项可以根据以下公式计算得出:第一消息的数据比特数目=指示一个组的数据比特数目分组的数目K。其中,第一消息中指示一个组的数据比特数目可以由网络设备和终端约定,也可以由标准协议预先定义。In the above first case, when the first configuration information configures the number of data bits of the first message or the number of groups associated with the first message, another item may be calculated according to the following formula: : Number of data bits of the first message = number K of packets indicating the number of data bits of one group. The number of data bits indicating a group in the first message may be agreed by the network device and the terminal, or may be predefined by a standard protocol.
第二种情况,第一消息关联的组数目可以包括多个跟踪区范围内的包括的多个终端分别进行分组的组数目,也可以包括将多个网络设备管辖范围内包括的多个终端分别进行分组的组数目,还可以包括将多个寻呼时机内包括的多个终端分别进行分组的组数目。这里,每个跟踪区、每个网络设备管辖范围、每个PO内的多个终端分组的组数目可以不同。In the second case, the number of groups associated with the first message may include the number of groups that are respectively grouped by multiple terminals included in the range of multiple tracking areas, and may also include multiple terminals included in the jurisdiction of multiple network devices. The number of groups to be grouped may further include a number of groups in which a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of paging occasions are separately grouped. Here, each tracking area, each network device jurisdiction, and the number of groups of multiple terminal groups within each PO may be different.
在上述第二种情况中,当第一配置信息配置了在第一消息中第一消息的数据比特数目,或者,第一消息关联的组的数目中的任意一项时,另外一项可以根据公式计算得出。In the second case, when the first configuration information configures any one of the number of data bits of the first message in the first message, or the number of groups associated with the first message, another item may be based on The formula is calculated.
举例说明,一个DRX周期内包括两个PO,第一消息关联的各组包括:第一个PO对应的多个终端分为的K1组,第二个PO对应的多个终端分为的K2组。计算公式可以为:第一消息的数据比特数目=指示一个组的数据比特数目(K1+K2),还可以为:第一消息的数据比特数目=指示第一个PO中一个组的数据比特数目K1+指示第二个PO中一个组的数据比特数目K2。其中,所述指示一个组的数据比特数目,指示第一个PO中一个组的数据比特数目或指示第二个PO中一个组的数据比特数目可以由网络设备和终端约定,也可以由标准协议预先定义。For example, a DR is included in a DRX cycle, and each group associated with the first message includes: a K1 group in which a plurality of terminals corresponding to the first PO are divided, and a K2 group in which multiple terminals corresponding to the second PO are divided into . The calculation formula may be: the number of data bits of the first message = the number of data bits indicating a group (K1+K2), and may also be: the number of data bits of the first message = the number of data bits indicating a group in the first PO K1+ indicates the number of data bits K2 of one of the second POs. The number of data bits indicating a group, indicating the number of data bits of a group in the first PO or the number of data bits indicating a group in the second PO may be agreed by the network device and the terminal, or may be determined by a standard protocol. Pre-defined.
可理解的,将多个跟踪区范围内的包括的多个终端分别进行分组,以及,将多个网络设备管辖范围内包括的多个终端分别进行分组的情况下,当第一配置信息配置了上述第一 消息的数据比特数目,或者,第一消息关联的组的数目中的任意一项时,另外一项可以根据公式计算得出,可参照上述具体实施例,在此不赘述。It can be understood that, when a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of tracking areas are separately grouped, and a plurality of terminals included in a plurality of network device jurisdictions are separately grouped, when the first configuration information is configured If the number of the data bits of the first message is the same as the number of the groups of the first message, the other one may be calculated according to the formula, and the specific embodiments are not mentioned herein.
结合上述第一配置信息的第一种实现方式,在可选的实施例中,第一配置信息也可以配置发送寻呼指示(第一消息)的物理下行控制信道的时频资源位置,或者,用于配置发送寻呼指示的信道的时频资源位置,用于指示终端接收寻呼指示。当第一消息通过DCI发送时,第一配置信息可以配置发送第一消息的控制信道的时频资源位置;当第一消息通过PDSCH进行发送,第一配置信息可以配置PDSCH的控制信道的时频资源位置。所述的控制信道可以是PDCCH,也可以是控制资源集合,还可以是公共搜索空间。In combination with the first implementation manner of the foregoing first configuration information, in an optional embodiment, the first configuration information may also be configured to send a time-frequency resource location of the physical downlink control channel of the paging indication (first message), or The time-frequency resource location of the channel for sending the paging indication is used to indicate that the terminal receives the paging indication. When the first message is sent by the DCI, the first configuration information may be configured to configure a time-frequency resource location of the control channel that sends the first message; when the first message is sent by using the PDSCH, the first configuration information may be configured to configure a time-frequency of the control channel of the PDSCH. Resource location. The control channel may be a PDCCH, a control resource set, or a common search space.
可理解的,当第一配置信息配置了以下至少一项信息:第一消息的数据比特数目、第一消息关联的组的数目、第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置、PO的数量、DRX周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量时,终端可根据第一配置信息,通过计算策略确定所在的组,具体可参照关键技术点(一)中的相关描述,在此不赘述。It can be understood that when the first configuration information is configured with at least one item of information: the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, used for calculation The number of data bits of the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks, may be determined by the calculation policy according to the first configuration information. For the group in which it is located, refer to the related description in the key technical point (1), and details are not described herein.
可理解的,当上述至少一项信息中有部分信息由标准协议预先定义,或者,由网络设备和终端预先约定的情况下,终端可根据预先定义或约定的信息以及第一配置信息确定终端所在的组,具体可参照关键技术点(一)中的相关描述,在此不赘述。It can be understood that, when some of the at least one piece of information is predefined by a standard protocol, or the network device and the terminal pre-arrange, the terminal may determine, according to the predefined or agreed information and the first configuration information, the terminal is located. For the specific group, refer to the related description in the key technical point (1), and details are not described herein.
第二种实现方式中,第一配置信息可用于配置终端的截断标识。In the second implementation manner, the first configuration information may be used to configure a truncated identifier of the terminal.
在可选实施例中,第一配置信息可直接包括终端的截断标识。在另一可选实施例中,第一配置信息可包括以下至少一项信息:终端的截断标识的数据比特数目、终端的截断标识在终端标识中的位置、PO的数量、DRX周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。In an alternative embodiment, the first configuration information may directly include a truncated identifier of the terminal. In another optional embodiment, the first configuration information may include at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the truncated identifier of the terminal, the location of the truncated identifier of the terminal in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or The number of sync signal blocks.
终端在接收到第一配置信息后,可根据第一配置信息确定自身的截断标识,具体可参照关键技术点(二)的相关描述。After receiving the first configuration information, the terminal may determine its truncated identifier according to the first configuration information, and specifically refer to the related description of the key technical point (2).
第三种实现方式中,第一配置信息可用于配置终端的索引。In a third implementation manner, the first configuration information may be used to configure an index of the terminal.
在上述第三种实现方式中,终端的索引为上述关键技术点(三)中的第二种情况(终端标识的一部分)和第三种情况(仅仅为一个索引值),下面分情况说明。In the foregoing third implementation manner, the index of the terminal is the second case (part of the terminal identifier) and the third case (only one index value) of the above-mentioned key technical points (3), which are described below.
第二种情况下,终端的索引为终端标识的一部分,第一配置信息用于指示终端的索引。In the second case, the index of the terminal is part of the terminal identifier, and the first configuration information is used to indicate the index of the terminal.
和上述第二种实现方式中类似,在可选实施例中,第一配置信息可直接包括终端的索引。Similar to the second implementation manner described above, in an optional embodiment, the first configuration information may directly include an index of the terminal.
在另一可选实施例中,第一配置信息可包括以下至少一项信息:终端的索引的数据比特数目、终端的索引在终端标识中的位置、PO的数量、DRX周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。In another optional embodiment, the first configuration information may include at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the index of the terminal, the location of the index of the terminal in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or a synchronization signal. The number of blocks.
第三种情况下,终端的索引仅仅为一个索引值,第一配置信息用于指示终端的索引值。举例说明,第一配置信息可以包括表1,表1中示出了各个终端可能对应的索引值。In the third case, the index of the terminal is only one index value, and the first configuration information is used to indicate the index value of the terminal. For example, the first configuration information may include Table 1, and the index values corresponding to the respective terminals are shown in Table 1.
终端terminal 索引值Index value
终端1Terminal 1 11
终端2Terminal 2 11
终端3Terminal 3 22
终端4Terminal 4 33
... ...
终端xTerminal x yy
表1Table 1
在上述三种实现方式中,第一配置信息都可以通过以下任意一种或者任意多种配置:系统信息(system information,SI)、主信息块(master information block,MIB)、系统信息块(system information block,SIB)、剩余最小系统信息(remaining minimum system information,RMSI)、其他系统信息(other system information,OSI)、下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)、媒体接入层控制元素(medium access control-control element,MAC-CE)、无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信息。In the above three implementation manners, the first configuration information may be configured by any one or any of the following: system information (SI), master information block (MIB), system information block (system) Information block (SIB), remaining minimum system information (RMSI), other system information (OSI), downlink control information (DCI), media access layer control element (medium access) Control-control element (MAC-CE), radio resource control (RRC) information.
基于上述主要发明原理以及关键技术点,下面通过多个实施例详细介绍本申请的信号传输方法。Based on the above-mentioned main inventive principles and key technical points, the signal transmission method of the present application will be described in detail below through various embodiments.
(一)实施例一(1) Embodiment 1
本实施例中,网络设备可向多个终端发送第一消息(paging indication)。接收到第一消息的多个终端向网络设备发送上行信号。网络设备根据上行信号可获知被寻呼终端所在的波束,并利用被寻呼终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。In this embodiment, the network device may send a paging indication to the plurality of terminals. The plurality of terminals receiving the first message send an uplink signal to the network device. The network device can learn the beam where the paged terminal is located according to the uplink signal, and send a paging message by using the beam where the paged terminal is located.
参见图7A,本实施例中的信号传输方法可包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 7A, the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
S101、网络设备向终端发送第一消息。S101. The network device sends a first message to the terminal.
本实施例中,所述终端可以包括一个跟踪区内的多个终端,也可以包括网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以包括一个或多个PO对应的多个终端。并且,该多个终端中包括至少一个被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
下面说明发送第一消息的具体时机。网络设备可在寻呼过程开始时向终端发送第一消息。寻呼过程有两种触发方式:第一种触发方式,核心网设备(例如MME)生成寻呼消息(paging),并发送给基站(例如gNB),以发起寻呼过程。第二种触发方式,基站(例如gNB)生成寻呼消息,并发起寻呼过程。The specific timing of sending the first message is explained below. The network device can send the first message to the terminal at the beginning of the paging process. There are two triggering methods for the paging process: in the first trigger mode, the core network device (for example, the MME) generates a paging message and sends it to the base station (for example, gNB) to initiate the paging process. In the second trigger mode, the base station (for example, gNB) generates a paging message and initiates a paging process.
本实施例中,第一消息的大小以及具体内容可以由网络设备配置。第一消息的实现方式可以有多种,本申请不做限制。In this embodiment, the size of the first message and the specific content may be configured by the network device. There are many ways to implement the first message, and the application does not limit the application.
S102、终端向网络设备发送上行信号。S102. The terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
具体的,接收到第一消息的多个终端都向网络设备发送上行信号。进一步的,不同PO对应的终端可以采用不同的随机接入时频资源向网络设备发送上行信号。Specifically, multiple terminals that receive the first message send uplink signals to the network device. Further, the terminals corresponding to different POs may send uplink signals to the network device by using different random access time-frequency resources.
在可选实施例中,终端发送的上行信号可以是随机接入过程向网络设备发送的前导序列(preamble)。In an optional embodiment, the uplink signal sent by the terminal may be a preamble sent by the random access procedure to the network device.
在可选的实施例中,不同的PO内的终端向网络设备发送不同的前导序列,或者可以使用不同的时频资源发送前导序列,以使得网络设备区分不同PO内的终端。In an optional embodiment, terminals in different POs send different preamble sequences to network devices, or may use different time-frequency resources to transmit preamble sequences, so that network devices distinguish terminals in different POs.
S103、网络设备根据上行信号确定终端所在的波束。S103. The network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
具体的,网络设备可根据终端发送的上行信号确定终端所在的波束范围,或者,终端对应的随机接入资源区域,或者,终端对应的天线端口信息。Specifically, the network device may determine, according to the uplink signal sent by the terminal, a beam range where the terminal is located, or a random access resource region corresponding to the terminal, or antenna port information corresponding to the terminal.
本实施例中,终端所在的波束为发送范围能够覆盖终端的波束。In this embodiment, the beam where the terminal is located is a beam whose transmission range can cover the terminal.
本实施例中,网络设备采用扫描每一个波束的方式接收上行信号。在接收上行信号后,网络设备可确定能够接收到上行信号的波束(一个或多个),并且,该波束的发送范围覆盖了发送上行信号的全部终端。由于发送上行信号的终端中包括了被寻呼终端,该波束的发 送范围覆盖了被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the network device receives the uplink signal by scanning each beam. After receiving the uplink signal, the network device may determine a beam(s) capable of receiving the uplink signal, and the transmission range of the beam covers all terminals transmitting the uplink signal. Since the terminal that transmits the uplink signal includes the paged terminal, the transmission range of the beam covers the paged terminal.
S104、网络设备使用终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。S104. The network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
具体的,所述终端所在的波束的发送范围覆盖了被寻呼终端,使用所述终端所在的波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息,能够确保被寻呼终端在自身所在的波束方向上接收到寻呼消息。Specifically, the transmission range of the beam where the terminal is located covers the paged terminal, and the beam is scanned by using the beam where the terminal is located, and the paging message is sent to ensure that the paged terminal receives the beam direction in the direction of the beam. Paging message.
经过步骤S104后,多个终端都能接收到寻呼消息。终端接收到寻呼消息后,查看寻呼消息中包括的被寻呼终端的信息是否和自身的信息相同,例如,可查看寻呼消息中的被寻呼IMSI是否和自身的IMSI相同。若相同,则说明该寻呼消息是发送给该终端的,该终端根据该寻呼消息进行相应的操作,若不同,则说明该寻呼消息不是发送给该终端的,该终端等待下一个寻呼消息的到来。After step S104, a plurality of terminals can receive the paging message. After receiving the paging message, the terminal checks whether the information of the paged terminal included in the paging message is the same as its own information. For example, it can check whether the paged IMSI in the paging message is the same as its own IMSI. If the information is the same, the paging message is sent to the terminal, and the terminal performs corresponding operations according to the paging message. If different, the paging message is not sent to the terminal, and the terminal waits for the next search. The arrival of the message.
具体的,在本申请中,寻呼消息可用于向被寻呼终端发送寻呼信息、通知终端系统信息更新、通知终端接接收地震、海啸预警系统(earthquake and tsunami warning system,ETWS)或者商业移动告警(commercial mobile alert service,CMAS)等。Specifically, in the present application, the paging message can be used to send paging information to the paged terminal, notify the terminal system information to update, notify the terminal to receive the earthquake, the tsunami warning system (ETWS) or the commercial mobile (commercial mobile alert service, CMAS), etc.
对于网络设备来说,在寻呼过程中,在不知道被寻呼的终端具体的方向的情况下,需要对所有的波束(即网络设备对应的总的波束数量)进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息。简单地说,相当于网络设备需要通过波束赋形技术分别将寻呼消息的能量限制到网络设备对应的每个波束上,再将寻呼消息发送出去,以确保被寻呼的终端接收到寻呼消息。每个波束都进行波束赋形开销较大。经过图7A所示方法实施例中的步骤,网络设备能够获知发送范围能够覆盖多个终端(包括被寻呼终端)的波束,并使用该波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息。这里,网络设备扫描的波束数量和网络设备对应的总的波束数量相比,降低了很多。因此,本实施例可以减少网络设备发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。For the network device, in the paging process, if the specific direction of the paged terminal is not known, it is necessary to perform beam scanning on all the beams (ie, the total number of beams corresponding to the network device), and send a page. Message. In a nutshell, the network device needs to limit the energy of the paging message to each beam corresponding to the network device by using the beamforming technology, and then send the paging message to ensure that the paged terminal receives the search. Call the message. Each beam has a large beamforming overhead. After the steps in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7A, the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam to perform beam scanning and send a paging message. Here, the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
(二)实施例二(2) Example 2
本实施例对应于上述关键技术点(一)中分组的场景。This embodiment corresponds to the scenario grouped in the above key technical point (1).
本实施例中,网络设备可向多个终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息。该多个终端根据第一配置信息确定所在的组,根据第一消息确定所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。包括被寻呼终端的组内的全部或部分终端可向网络设备发送上行信号。网络设备根据上行信号发送寻呼信息。In this embodiment, the network device may send the first configuration information and the first message to multiple terminals. The plurality of terminals determine the group in which the group is located according to the first configuration information, and determine, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged. All or a portion of the terminals within the group including the paged terminal may send an uplink signal to the network device. The network device sends paging information according to the uplink signal.
本实施例中,第一消息的实现方式为关键技术点(四)中第一种实现方式,第一配置信息的实现方式为关键技术点(五)中的第一种实现方式。In this embodiment, the implementation manner of the first message is the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4), and the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the first implementation manner in the key technical point (5).
参见图7B,本实施例中的信号传输方法可包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 7B, the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
S201、网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息;第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组;所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。S201: The network device sends the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal. The first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, and the first message is used to indicate whether the group where the terminal is located has a terminal. Was paged.
本实施例中,所述终端可以包括一个跟踪区内的多个终端,也可以包括网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以包括一个或多个PO对应的多个终端。并且,该多个终端中包括至少一个被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
本实施例中,第一配置信息和第一消息可以同时发送,也可以分开发送,本申请不做限制。In this embodiment, the first configuration information and the first message may be sent simultaneously or separately, and the application does not limit the application.
首先,介绍第一配置信息。First, introduce the first configuration information.
网络设备每次发送的第一配置信息可以不同,也可以相同。即,网络设备可动态地配 置以下至少一项信息:第一消息的数据比特数目、第一消息关联的组的数目、第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置、PO的数量、DRX周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。例如,在一段时间内,第一配置信息可配置第一消息的比特数目为X1,在另外一段时间内,第一配置信息可配置第一消息的比特数目为X2。The first configuration information sent by the network device may be different or the same. That is, the network device may dynamically configure at least one of the following: the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and the information for calculating the grouping information. The number of data bits, the position of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of sync signal blocks. For example, in a period of time, the first configuration information may configure the number of bits of the first message to be X1, and in another period of time, the first configuration information may configure the number of bits of the first message to be X2.
本实施例中,网络设备通过第一配置信息配置上述至少一项信息时,可根据当前实际情况(终端的总数目或者被寻呼终端的数目)动态配置,具体可参照关键技术点(五)第一种实现方式的相关描述。其次,介绍第一消息。本实施例中,第一消息的实现可参照关键技术点(四)中第一种实现方式的相关描述,在此不赘述。In this embodiment, when the network device configures the at least one piece of information by using the first configuration information, the network device may dynamically configure according to the current actual situation (the total number of terminals or the number of pages to be paged), and may refer to key technical points (5). A related description of the first implementation. Second, introduce the first message. In this embodiment, the implementation of the first message may refer to the related description of the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4), and details are not described herein.
在可选的实施例中,第一消息可以与系统修改相关消息一起发送。例如,在DCI中,可同时包括第一消息和系统修改相关消息。又例如,在PDSCH消息中,可同时包括第一消息和系统修改相关消息。这里,系统修改相关消息可包括以下至少一项:通知终端系统信息更新的信息、通知终端接接收地震、海啸预警系统的信息或者商业移动告警的信息等。In an alternative embodiment, the first message may be sent with a system modification related message. For example, in DCI, the first message and the system modification related message can be included at the same time. For another example, in the PDSCH message, the first message and the system modification related message may be included at the same time. Here, the system modification related message may include at least one of the following: information notifying the terminal system information update, notifying the terminal to receive the earthquake, information of the tsunami warning system, or information of the commercial mobile alarm.
S202、终端根据第一配置信息确定所在的组。S202. The terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, the group that is located.
参见关键技术点(一)和关键技术点(五)第一种实现方式中的相关描述,终端可根据第一配置信息确定其所在的组。由于第一配置信息配置的各项信息可动态变化,因此,各个终端每次根据第一配置信息确定的自身所在的组也可能动态变化。Referring to the related descriptions in the first implementation manner of the key technical point (1) and the key technical point (5), the terminal can determine the group in which it is located according to the first configuration information. Since each piece of information configured by the first configuration information can be dynamically changed, each group that is determined by the terminal according to the first configuration information may dynamically change.
进一步的,终端还可根据第一配置信息确定对应的PO,确定PO后,在寻呼过程中,终端可监听DRX周期内该终端对应的PO,查看是否有寻呼消息、第一消息或者其他寻呼信息。Further, the terminal may further determine the corresponding PO according to the first configuration information. After determining the PO, in the paging process, the terminal may monitor the PO corresponding to the terminal in the DRX cycle, and check whether there is a paging message, a first message, or other Paging information.
在可选的实施例中,终端所在的PO可以和PO的配置信息的周期相关。由于在RMSI信息或者OSI信息中有可能包括PO的配置信息,因此,例如,终端所在的PO可以与RMSI的周期相关,或者其他系统信息的周期相关。In an optional embodiment, the PO where the terminal is located may be related to the period of the configuration information of the PO. Since it is possible to include the configuration information of the PO in the RMSI information or the OSI information, for example, the PO in which the terminal is located may be related to the period of the RMSI, or the period of other system information.
S203、终端根据第一消息判断所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。S203. The terminal determines, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged.
参见关键技术点(四)第一消息的第一种实现方式的相关描述,终端可根据第一消息确定所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。Referring to the related description of the first implementation manner of the first message of the key technical point (4), the terminal may determine, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is located is paged.
S204、若终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,终端向网络设备发送上行信号。S204. If the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
在本实施例中,被寻呼终端所在的组内包括的所有或者部分终端都向网络设备发送上行信号。可理解的,步骤S204中,终端发送上行信号的实现和实施例一中步骤S102类似,可参照相关描述,在此不赘述。In this embodiment, all or part of the terminals included in the group in which the paged terminal is located transmit an uplink signal to the network device. It can be understood that, in step S204, the implementation of the uplink signal sent by the terminal is similar to the step S102 in the first embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
S205、网络设备根据上行信号确定终端所在的波束。S205. The network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
本实施例中,步骤S205的实现和实施例一中步骤S103类似,网络设备采用扫描每一个波束的方式接收上行信号。在接收上行信号后,网络设备可确定能够接收到上行信号的波束(一个或多个),并且,该波束的发送范围覆盖了发送上行信号的全部终端。由于发送上行信号的终端是包括了被寻呼终端,该波束的发送范围覆盖了被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the implementation of step S205 is similar to the step S103 in the first embodiment, and the network device receives the uplink signal by scanning each beam. After receiving the uplink signal, the network device may determine a beam(s) capable of receiving the uplink signal, and the transmission range of the beam covers all terminals transmitting the uplink signal. Since the terminal transmitting the uplink signal includes the paged terminal, the transmission range of the beam covers the paged terminal.
在可选的实施例中,不同的PO内的终端向网络设备发送不同的前导序列,或者可以使用不同的时频资源发送前导序列,以使得网络设备区分不同的PO内的终端。In an optional embodiment, terminals in different POs send different preamble sequences to network devices, or may transmit preamble sequences using different time-frequency resources, so that the network devices distinguish terminals in different POs.
S206、网络设备使用终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。S206. The network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
具体的,所述终端所在的波束的发送范围覆盖了被寻呼终端,使用所述终端所在的波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息,能够确保被寻呼终端在自身所在的波束方向上接收到寻 呼消息。Specifically, the transmission range of the beam where the terminal is located covers the paged terminal, and the beam is scanned by using the beam where the terminal is located, and the paging message is sent to ensure that the paged terminal receives the beam direction in the direction of the beam. Paging message.
本实施例中,寻呼消息的作用和实施例一中相同,可参照相关描述。这里,寻呼消息的实现有两种可能,下面详细说明。In this embodiment, the function of the paging message is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the related description can be referred to. Here, there are two possibilities for implementing a paging message, which is described in detail below.
第一种可能,寻呼消息中包括被寻呼终端的终端标识列表(record list)。网络设备使用终端所在的波束,进行波束扫描发送寻呼消息后,被寻呼终端所在的组内的多个终端可接收到所述寻呼消息。该多个终端中的每个终端可查看被寻呼终端标识列表中是否存在和自身的终端标识相同的终端标识,若存在,则该终端是被寻呼终端,该终端根据寻呼消息进行相应的操作。The first possibility is that the paging message includes a terminal list of the paged terminal. After the network device uses the beam where the terminal is located to perform beam scanning and sends a paging message, the plurality of terminals in the group where the paged terminal is located can receive the paging message. Each terminal of the plurality of terminals can view whether the terminal identifier of the paging terminal identifier list is the same as the terminal identifier of the terminal, and if yes, the terminal is a paged terminal, and the terminal performs corresponding according to the paging message. Operation.
第二种可能,寻呼消息中包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引。当有多个被寻呼终端时,寻呼消息中可包括被寻呼终端的截断标识列表或者被寻呼终端的索引列表。网络设备使用终端所在的波束,进行波束扫描发送寻呼消息后,被寻呼终端所在的组内的多个终端可接收到所述寻呼消息。该多个终端中的每个终端可查看自身是否是被寻呼终端:若被寻呼终端的截断标识列表中包括某终端的截断标识,或者,被寻呼终端的索引列表中包括某终端的索引,那么,该终端可能是被寻呼终端。下面说明,该终端为何可能是被寻呼终端,以及,该终端如何确定自身是否是被寻呼终端。In a second possibility, the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one of the paged terminals. When there are a plurality of paged terminals, the page message may include a list of truncated identifiers of the paged terminals or an index list of the pages to be paged. After the network device uses the beam where the terminal is located to perform beam scanning and sends a paging message, the plurality of terminals in the group where the paged terminal is located can receive the paging message. Each of the plurality of terminals can check whether it is a paged terminal: if the truncated identifier list of the paged terminal includes a truncation identifier of a terminal, or the index list of the paged terminal includes a terminal Index, then, the terminal may be the paged terminal. The following explains why the terminal is likely to be the paged terminal and how the terminal determines whether it is the paged terminal.
由于截断标识或索引不具有唯一性,因此,即使某终端的截断标识和被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,某终端的索引和被寻呼终端的索引相同,该终端也不一定是被寻呼终端。在该终端不能确定自身是否是被寻呼终端的情况下,网络设备可通过消息4(MSG4)中向该终端发送确认消息,确认消息中可携带有被寻呼终端的指示信息,指示信息可以是被寻呼终端的完整标识,用于指示该终端是否被寻呼。该终端接收到确认消息后,可确定自身是否是被寻呼终端,例如,若该终端的标识和被寻呼终端的标识相同,则该终端是被寻呼终端。若该终端是被寻呼终端,该终端根据寻呼消息进行相应的操作。Since the truncation identifier or the index is not unique, even if the truncation identifier of a terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the paged terminal, or the index of a terminal and the index of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is not necessarily Paging terminal. In the case that the terminal cannot determine whether it is a paged terminal, the network device may send an acknowledgement message to the terminal in message 4 (MSG4), and the acknowledgement message may carry the indication information of the paged terminal, and the indication information may be It is the complete identifier of the paged terminal and indicates whether the terminal is paged. After receiving the acknowledgement message, the terminal may determine whether it is a paged terminal. For example, if the identifier of the terminal and the identifier of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is the paged terminal. If the terminal is a paged terminal, the terminal performs a corresponding operation according to the paging message.
基于实施例二,在可选实施例中,可以设置一个计时器timer或者阈值。网络设备和终端都可计算在计时器表示的时间内,终端向网络设备发送了上行信号,但该终端并不是本次寻呼的被寻呼终端的次数,当次数超过阈值的时候,终端可以向网络设备申请更换终端的所在的组,或者,网络设备可直接为终端重新配置确定第一配置信息,用于终端重新确定终端所在的组。一种可能的方式是,网络设备通过第一配置信息为终端重新配置上述至少一项信息,可以减少终端发送上行信号却并不是被寻呼终端的概率,即,降低虚警概率。Based on the second embodiment, in an alternative embodiment, a timer timer or threshold can be set. Both the network device and the terminal can calculate that the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device within the time indicated by the timer, but the terminal is not the number of times of the paged terminal of the current paging. When the number of times exceeds the threshold, the terminal can Applying to the network device for the group in which the terminal is replaced, or the network device may directly determine the first configuration information for the terminal reconfiguration, and the terminal re-determines the group in which the terminal is located. One possible way is that the network device reconfigures the at least one piece of information for the terminal by using the first configuration information, which can reduce the probability that the terminal sends the uplink signal but is not the paged terminal, that is, reduces the false alarm probability.
在另一可选实施例中,也可不用设置计时器timer或者阈值,一旦出现虚警的情况,终端向网络设备申请更换终端所在的组,或者,网络设备直接为终端重新配置上述相关信息。In another optional embodiment, the timer timer or the threshold may not be set. When a false alarm occurs, the terminal requests the network device to replace the group where the terminal is located, or the network device directly reconfigures the related information for the terminal.
通过实施例二所示的方法,网络设备能够根据实际情况配置第一消息的占用的比特数目大小,以及,第一消息关联的组数目,从而动态地配置第一消息。本实施例中,被寻呼终端所在的组内的所有或部分终端向网络设备发送上行信号,网络设备能够获知发送范围能够覆盖多个终端(包括被寻呼终端)的波束,并使用该波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息。这里,网络设备扫描的波束数量和网络设备对应的总的波束数量相比,降低了很多。因此,本实施例可以减少网络设备发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。Through the method shown in the second embodiment, the network device can configure the number of occupied bits of the first message and the number of groups associated with the first message according to actual conditions, thereby dynamically configuring the first message. In this embodiment, all or part of the terminals in the group in which the paged terminal is located send an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam. Perform beam scanning and send a paging message. Here, the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
(三)实施例三(III) Third embodiment
本实施例和实施例二的不同之处在于,在步骤S201中,网络设备无需向终端发送第一配置信息,且,不包括步骤S202,终端无需根据第一配置信息确定所在的组。其他步骤都和实施例二相同。The difference between this embodiment and the second embodiment is that, in step S201, the network device does not need to send the first configuration information to the terminal, and does not include step S202, the terminal does not need to determine the group according to the first configuration information. The other steps are the same as in the second embodiment.
本实施例中,网络设备无需向终端发送第一配置信息,第一消息的数据比特数目、第一消息关联的组的数目、第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特在终端标识中的位置、PO的数量、DRX周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量中的至少一项可以由网络侧和终端约定,也可以由标准协议预先定义。参照关键技术点(一)终端的分组方式可知,终端可通过上述网络设备侧和终端约定的信息,或者标准协议预先定义的信息确定所在的组。In this embodiment, the network device does not need to send the first configuration information to the terminal, the number of data bits of the first message, the number of groups associated with the first message, the number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and is used to calculate the grouping. At least one of the number of data bits of the information, the position of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identifier, the number of POs, the length of the DRX cycle, or the number of synchronization signal blocks may be agreed by the network side and the terminal, or may be Predefined by standard protocols. Referring to the key technology point (1), the terminal grouping manner can be known that the terminal can determine the group in the group through the information agreed by the network device side and the terminal, or the information predefined by the standard protocol.
本实施例中,和实施例二中相同,第一消息同样用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。第一消息的实现方式可参照关键技术点(四)第一种实现方式的相关描述。In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the first message is also used to indicate whether the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged. The implementation of the first message can refer to the related description of the first implementation manner of the key technical point (4).
通过实施例三所示的方法,被寻呼终端所在的组内的所有或部分终端向网络设备发送上行信号,网络设备能够获知发送范围能够覆盖多个终端(包括被寻呼终端)的波束,并使用该波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息。这里,网络设备扫描的波束数量和网络设备对应的总的波束数量相比,降低了很多。因此,本实施例可以减少网络设备发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。Through the method shown in the third embodiment, all or part of the terminals in the group in which the paging terminal is located send an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal). The beam is used for beam scanning to send a paging message. Here, the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
(四)实施例四(4) Example 4
本实施例对应于上述关键技术点(二)中截断标识和(三)中终端索引的场景。This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the truncation identifier in the above-mentioned key technical point (2) and the terminal index in (3).
本实施例中,网络设备可向多个终端发送第一配置信息和寻呼消息。该多个终端根据第一配置信息确定自身的截断标识或索引,根据寻呼消息确定是否被寻呼。In this embodiment, the network device may send the first configuration information and the paging message to the multiple terminals. The plurality of terminals determine their own truncation identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and determine whether to be paged according to the paging message.
本实施例中,第一配置信息的实现方式为上述关键技术点(五)中第二种实现方式和第三种实现方式。In this embodiment, the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (5).
参见图7C,本实施例中的信号传输方法可包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 7C, the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
S301、网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息和寻呼消息;第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;寻呼消息中包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引。S301: The network device sends the first configuration information and the paging message to the terminal. The first configuration information is used to configure a truncated identifier or index of the terminal, and the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal.
本实施例中,所述终端可以包括一个跟踪区内的多个终端,也可以包括网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以包括一个或多个PO对应的多个终端。并且,该多个终端中包括至少一个被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
本实施例中,第一配置信息和寻呼消息可以同时发送,也可以分开发送,本申请不做限制。网络设备每次发送的第一配置信息可以不同,也可以相同。即,网络设备可动态地配置终端的截断标识或索引,对于一个终端,该终端的截断标识或索引可以动态变化。In this embodiment, the first configuration information and the paging message may be sent simultaneously or separately, and the application does not limit the application. The first configuration information sent by the network device may be different or the same. That is, the network device can dynamically configure the truncated identifier or index of the terminal. For a terminal, the truncated identifier or index of the terminal can be dynamically changed.
本实施例中,网络设备发送第一配置信息的具体时机可以有多种,下面简单列举几种可能的发送第一配置信息的具体时机。In this embodiment, the specific timing for the network device to send the first configuration information may be multiple. The following is a brief description of several possible specific occasions for sending the first configuration information.
第一种,在终端初始接入过程中或处于空闲(idle)态时,网络设备可通过MIB信息,DCI信息,系统信息或RMSI向终端发送第一配置信息。这里,一个终端对应的截断标识或索引可以不同,第一配置信息可动态变化或者动态配置。First, during the initial access process of the terminal or in an idle state, the network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal by using MIB information, DCI information, system information or RMSI. Here, the truncation identifier or index corresponding to one terminal may be different, and the first configuration information may be dynamically changed or dynamically configured.
第二种,在终端处于连接态时,网络设备可以通过RRC信令、DCI,MAC-CE向终端发送第一配置信息。这里,一个终端对应的截断标识或索引可以不同,第一配置信息可动态变化或者动态配置。Second, when the terminal is in the connected state, the network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal through RRC signaling, DCI, and MAC-CE. Here, the truncation identifier or index corresponding to one terminal may be different, and the first configuration information may be dynamically changed or dynamically configured.
第三种,终端进入一个TA区域或者开机时,即终端发起附着请求,向MME注册的时候,向网络设备(例如MME)上报注册信息(旧TA区域标识,终端标识,特定DRX周期等内容)后,网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息。这里,第一配置信息可仅发送一次,发送一次后,终端对应的截断标识或索引可能不再发生变化。The third type, when the terminal enters a TA area or is powered on, that is, the terminal initiates an attach request, and when registering with the MME, reports the registration information (the old TA area identifier, the terminal identifier, the specific DRX period, etc.) to the network device (for example, the MME). Afterwards, the network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal. Here, the first configuration information may be sent only once, and after being sent once, the truncation identifier or index corresponding to the terminal may not change any more.
不限于上述列举的几种发送第一配置信息的具体时机,具体实现中,网络设备还可以在其他的时机内发送第一配置信息,本申请不做任何限制。The specific configuration is not limited to the specific time when the first configuration information is sent. In the specific implementation, the network device may also send the first configuration information in other occasions, and the application does not impose any limitation.
S302、所述终端根据第一配置信息,确定所述终端的截断标识或索引。S302. The terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal.
本实施例中,所述终端可根据第一配置信息确定自身的截断标识或索引,具体可参照关键技术(二)和关键技术点(五)中第二种实现方式的相关描述,或者,可参照关键技术(三)和关键技术点(五)中第三种实现方式的相关描述。In this embodiment, the terminal may determine its truncated identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and specifically refer to the related descriptions of the second implementation manner in the key technology (2) and the key technical point (5), or Refer to the relevant description of the third implementation of key technology (3) and key technology points (5).
S303、所述终端根据寻呼消息判断所述终端的截断标识是否和至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,所述终端的索引是否和至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同。S303. The terminal determines, according to the paging message, whether the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or whether the index of the terminal is the same as the index of the at least one paging terminal.
S304、若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。S304. If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, the terminal is to the The network device sends an uplink signal.
本实施例中,寻呼消息中包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引。当有多个被寻呼终端时,寻呼消息中可包括被寻呼终端的截断标识列表或者被寻呼终端的索引列表。接收到寻呼消息的多个终端中的每个终端可查看自身是否是被寻呼终端:若被寻呼终端的截断标识列表中包括某终端的截断标识,或者,被寻呼终端的索引列表中包括某终端的索引,那么,该终端可能是被寻呼终端。下面说明,该终端为何可能是被寻呼终端,以及,该终端如何确定自身是否是被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the paging message includes a truncation identifier or index of at least one paged terminal. When there are a plurality of paged terminals, the page message may include a list of truncated identifiers of the paged terminals or an index list of the pages to be paged. Each of the plurality of terminals that receive the paging message can check whether it is a paged terminal: if the truncated identifier list of the paged terminal includes a truncation identifier of a terminal, or an index list of the paged terminal The index of a terminal is included, and then the terminal may be a paged terminal. The following explains why the terminal is likely to be the paged terminal and how the terminal determines whether it is the paged terminal.
由于截断标识或索引不具有唯一性,因此,即使某终端的截断标识和被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,即使某终端的索引和被寻呼终端的索引相同,该终端也不一定是被寻呼终端。在该终端不能确定自身是否是被寻呼终端的情况下,网络设备可通过消息4(MSG4)中向该终端发送确认消息,确认消息中可携带有被寻呼终端的指示信息,指示信息可以是被寻呼终端的完整标识,用于指示该终端是否被寻呼。该终端接收到确认消息后,可确定自身是否是被寻呼终端,例如,若该终端的标识和被寻呼终端的标识相同,则该终端是被寻呼终端。Since the truncation identifier or the index is not unique, even if the truncation identifier of a terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the paged terminal, or even if the index of a terminal and the index of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is not necessarily the same. The terminal is being paged. In the case that the terminal cannot determine whether it is a paged terminal, the network device may send an acknowledgement message to the terminal in message 4 (MSG4), and the acknowledgement message may carry the indication information of the paged terminal, and the indication information may be It is the complete identifier of the paged terminal and indicates whether the terminal is paged. After receiving the acknowledgement message, the terminal may determine whether it is a paged terminal. For example, if the identifier of the terminal and the identifier of the paged terminal are the same, the terminal is the paged terminal.
若某个终端是被寻呼终端,该终端向网络设备发送上行信号,以对网络设备发送寻呼消息的行为作出响应。在可选实施例中,终端发送的上行信号可以是随机接入过程向网络设备发送的前导序列(preamble)。If a terminal is a paged terminal, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device to respond to the behavior of the network device transmitting the paging message. In an optional embodiment, the uplink signal sent by the terminal may be a preamble sent by the random access procedure to the network device.
基于实施例四,在可选实施例中,可以设置一个计时器timer或者阈值。网络设备和终端都可计算在计时器表示的时间内,终端向网络设备发送了上行信号,但该终端并不是本次寻呼的被寻呼终端的次数,当次数超过阈值的时候,终端可以向网络设备申请更换终端的截断标识,或者,网络设备可直接为终端配置一个新的截断标识。一种可能的方式是,网络设备为通过第一配置信息为终端配置一个较长的截断标识,可以减少终端发送上行信号,但终端却并不是被寻呼终端的概率,即,降低虚警概率。Based on the fourth embodiment, in an alternative embodiment, a timer timer or threshold may be set. Both the network device and the terminal can calculate that the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device within the time indicated by the timer, but the terminal is not the number of times of the paged terminal of the current paging. When the number of times exceeds the threshold, the terminal can Apply to the network device for the truncation identifier of the replacement terminal, or the network device can directly configure a new truncation identifier for the terminal. A possible way is that the network device configures a long truncation identifier for the terminal by using the first configuration information, which can reduce the probability that the terminal sends the uplink signal, but the terminal is not the paged terminal, that is, the false alarm probability is reduced. .
在另一可选实施例中,也可不用设置计时器timer或者阈值,一旦出现虚警的情况,终端向网络设备申请更换终端的截断标识,或者,网络设备直接为终端配置一个新的截断 标识。In another optional embodiment, the timer timer or the threshold may not be set. When a false alarm occurs, the terminal requests the network device to change the truncation identifier of the terminal, or the network device directly configures a new truncation identifier for the terminal. .
通过实施例四所示的方法,网络设备通过第一配置信息能够动态地配置每个终端的截断标识或索引。在寻呼消息中通过截断标识或索引寻呼终端,和通过终端的完整标识寻呼终端相比,寻呼消息携带的内容更少,降低了发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。Through the method shown in Embodiment 4, the network device can dynamically configure the truncation identifier or index of each terminal by using the first configuration information. In the paging message, the paging message is intercepted or indexed, and the paging message carries less content than the full identity paging terminal of the terminal, which reduces the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the paging message is sent.
(五)实施例五(5) Example 5
本实施例对应于上述关键技术点(二)中截断标识和关键技术点(三)中终端索引的场景。This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the terminal index in the truncated identifier and the key technical point (3) in the above key technical point (2).
本实施例中,网络设备可向多个终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息。该多个终端根据第一配置信息确定自身的截断标识或索引,根据第一消息确定是否向网络设备发送上行信号。网络设备根据上行信号可获知被寻呼终端所在的波束,并利用被寻呼终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。In this embodiment, the network device may send the first configuration information and the first message to multiple terminals. The plurality of terminals determine their own truncation identifier or index according to the first configuration information, and determine whether to send an uplink signal to the network device according to the first message. The network device can learn the beam where the paged terminal is located according to the uplink signal, and send a paging message by using the beam where the paged terminal is located.
本实施例中,第一消息的实现方式为上述关键技术点(四)中第二种实现方式和第三种实现方式,第一配置信息的实现方式为上述关键技术点(五)中第二种实现方式和第三种实现方式。In this embodiment, the implementation manner of the first message is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (4), and the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the second key technical point (5). Implementation and third implementation.
参见图7D,本实施例中的信号传输方法可包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 7D, the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
S401、网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息;第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识,或者,所述终端的索引;第一消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引。S401. The network device sends the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal. The first configuration information is used to configure a truncated identifier of the terminal, or an index of the terminal. The first message includes a truncation of the at least one paged terminal. Identification or index.
本实施例中,所述终端可以包括一个跟踪区内的多个终端,也可以包括网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以包括一个或多个PO对应的多个终端。并且,该多个终端中包括至少一个被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
本实施例中,第一配置信息和第一消息可以同时发送,也可以分开发送,本申请不做限制。网络设备每次发送的第一配置信息可以不同,也可以相同。即,网络设备可动态地配置终端的截断标识或索引,对于一个终端,该终端的截断标识或索引可以动态变化。In this embodiment, the first configuration information and the first message may be sent simultaneously or separately, and the application does not limit the application. The first configuration information sent by the network device may be different or the same. That is, the network device can dynamically configure the truncated identifier or index of the terminal. For a terminal, the truncated identifier or index of the terminal can be dynamically changed.
首先,说明第一配置信息。本实施例中,第一配置信息的实现方式为上述关键技术点(五)中第二种实现方式和第三种实现方式。发送第一配置信息的具体时机可参照实施例四中的相关描述。First, the first configuration information will be explained. In this embodiment, the implementation manner of the first configuration information is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (5). For a specific timing of transmitting the first configuration information, refer to the related description in Embodiment 4.
其次,说明第一消息。本实施例中,第一消息的实现方式为上述关键技术点(四)中第二种实现方式和第三种实现方式。发送第一消息的具体时机可参照实施例一步骤S101的相关描述。Next, the first message is explained. In this embodiment, the implementation manner of the first message is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (4). For a specific timing of sending the first message, refer to the related description of step S101 in Embodiment 1.
S402、终端根据第一配置信息确定截断标识或索引。S402. The terminal determines, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index.
S403、终端根据第一消息判断终端的截断标识是否和至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或,终端的索引是否和至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同。S403. The terminal determines, according to the first message, whether the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or whether the index of the terminal is the same as the index of the at least one paged terminal.
S404、若终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向网络设备发送上行信号。S404. If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, the terminal sends an uplink to the network device. signal.
本实施例中,相当于通过截断标识或者索引将终端分类。终端在接收到第一消息后,查看自身的截断标识和第一消息中包含的至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识是否相同,或者,查看自身的索引和第一消息中包含的至少一个被寻呼终端的索引是否相同。若相同,所述终端则向网络设备发送上行信号。In this embodiment, the terminal is classified by the truncation identifier or the index. After receiving the first message, the terminal checks whether the truncated identifier of the first message is the same as the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal included in the first message, or the index of the self and the at least one of the first message are found. Whether the index of the calling terminal is the same. If they are the same, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
本实施例中,截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同的全部或部分终端,或者,索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同的全部或部分终端,向网络设备发送上行信号。发送上行信号的终端中包括了被寻呼终端。可理解的,步骤S404中,终端发送上行信号的实现和实施例一中步骤S102类似,可参照相关描述,在此不赘述。In this embodiment, all or part of the terminal having the same truncation identifier as the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or all or part of the index having the same index as the at least one paged terminal, to the network device Send an upstream signal. The terminal that transmits the uplink signal includes the paged terminal. It can be understood that, in step S404, the implementation of the uplink signal sent by the terminal is similar to the step S102 in the first embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
S405、网络设备根据所述上行信号确定所述终端所在的波束。S405. The network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
本实施例中,步骤S405的实现和实施例一中步骤S103类似,网络设备采用扫描每一个波束的方式接收上行信号。在接收上行信号后,网络设备可确定能够接收到上行信号的波束(一个或多个),并且,该波束的发送范围覆盖了发送上行信号的全部终端。由于发送上行信号的终端是包括了被寻呼终端,该波束的发送范围覆盖了被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the implementation of step S405 is similar to the step S103 in the first embodiment, and the network device receives the uplink signal by scanning each beam. After receiving the uplink signal, the network device may determine a beam(s) capable of receiving the uplink signal, and the transmission range of the beam covers all terminals transmitting the uplink signal. Since the terminal transmitting the uplink signal includes the paged terminal, the transmission range of the beam covers the paged terminal.
S406、网络设备使用终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。S406. The network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
具体的,所述终端所在的波束的发送范围覆盖了被寻呼终端,使用所述终端所在的波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息,能够确保被寻呼终端在自身所在的波束方向上接收到寻呼消息。Specifically, the transmission range of the beam where the terminal is located covers the paged terminal, and the beam is scanned by using the beam where the terminal is located, and the paging message is sent to ensure that the paged terminal receives the beam direction in the direction of the beam. Paging message.
本实施例中,寻呼消息的作用和实施例一中相同,可参照相关描述。这里,寻呼消息的实现和实施例二中第一种可能相同,下面详细描述。In this embodiment, the function of the paging message is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the related description can be referred to. Here, the implementation of the paging message may be the same as the first one in the second embodiment, which is described in detail below.
寻呼消息中包括被寻呼终端的终端标识列表(record list)。网络设备使用终端所在的波束,进行波束扫描发送寻呼消息后,被寻呼终端所在的组内的多个终端可接收到所述寻呼消息。该多个终端中的每个终端可查看被寻呼终端标识列表中是否存在和自身的终端标识相同的终端标识,若存在,则该终端是被寻呼终端,该终端根据寻呼消息进行相应的操作。The paging message includes a terminal list of the paged terminal. After the network device uses the beam where the terminal is located to perform beam scanning and sends a paging message, the plurality of terminals in the group where the paged terminal is located can receive the paging message. Each terminal of the plurality of terminals can view whether the terminal identifier of the paging terminal identifier list is the same as the terminal identifier of the terminal, and if yes, the terminal is a paged terminal, and the terminal performs corresponding according to the paging message. Operation.
通过实施例五所示的方法,网络设备通过第一配置信息能够动态地配置每个终端的截断标识或索引。本实施例中,截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识的全部或部分终端(包括被寻呼终端),或者,索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的相同的全部或部分终端(包括被寻呼终端),向网络设备发送上行信号。网络设备能够获知发送范围能够覆盖多个终端(包括被寻呼终端)的波束,并使用该波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息。这里,网络设备扫描的波束数量和网络设备对应的总的波束数量相比,降低了很多。因此,本实施例可以减少网络设备发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。Through the method shown in Embodiment 5, the network device can dynamically configure the truncation identifier or index of each terminal by using the first configuration information. In this embodiment, the truncated identifier and all or part of the terminal (including the paged terminal) of the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the index and the same all or part of the at least one paged terminal The terminal (including the paged terminal) sends an uplink signal to the network device. The network device can know that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam to perform beam scanning and send a paging message. Here, the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
(六)实施例六(6) Example 6
本实施例对应于上述关键技术点(一)中分组的场景。This embodiment corresponds to the scenario grouped in the above key technical point (1).
本实施例中,各个终端自主确定用于计算分组信息的数据比特,并通过第二消息上报给网络设备。网络设备可向多个终端发送第一消息,该多个终端根据第一消息确定所在的组是否包括被寻呼终端。包括被寻呼终端的组内的全部或部分终端可向网络设备发送上行信号。网络设备根据上行信号发送寻呼信息。In this embodiment, each terminal autonomously determines a data bit for calculating the packet information, and reports the data bit to the network device by using the second message. The network device may send a first message to the plurality of terminals, the plurality of terminals determining, according to the first message, whether the group in which the group is included includes the paged terminal. All or a portion of the terminals within the group including the paged terminal may send an uplink signal to the network device. The network device sends paging information according to the uplink signal.
本实施例中,第一消息的实现方式为关键技术点(四)中第一种实现方式。In this embodiment, the implementation manner of the first message is the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4).
参见图7E,本实施例中的信号传输方法可包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 7E, the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
S501、终端向网络设备发送第二消息;第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特。S501. The terminal sends a second message to the network device. The second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating the group information.
本实施例中,所述终端可以包括一个跟踪区内的多个终端,也可以包括网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以包括一个或多个PO对应的多个终端。并且,该多个终端中包括 至少一个被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
终端可在进入一个TA区域或者开机时,即终端发起附着请求,向MME注册的时候,向网络设备(例如MME)上报注册信息(终端标识,特定DRX周期等内容)时,第二信息和注册信息同时上报。这里,第二信息可仅发送一次,发送一次后,终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特可能不再发生变化。When the terminal enters a TA area or is powered on, that is, when the terminal initiates an attach request and registers with the MME, when the network device (for example, the MME) reports the registration information (terminal identifier, specific DRX cycle, etc.), the second information and the registration are performed. The information is reported at the same time. Here, the second information may be sent only once, and once transmitted, the data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating the packet information may not change any more.
本实施例中,各个终端自主确定用于计算分组信息的数据比特。各个终端确定的用于计算分组信息的数据比特的长度和位置都有可能不同,本申请不做限制。In this embodiment, each terminal autonomously determines data bits for calculating packet information. The length and location of the data bits determined by each terminal for calculating the packet information may be different, and the present application is not limited.
本实施例中,终端可根据自主确定的用于计算分组信息的数据比特,相当于自主确定所在的组,具体可参照参见关键技术点(一)中分组方式的相关描述。举例说明,终端可根据关键技术点(一)中的第二种计算策略,通过公式n=(用于计算分组信息的数据比特)mod K来计算终端所在的组,K可以由标准协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备和终端约定。In this embodiment, the terminal can determine the data bits used for calculating the group information according to the autonomous determination, which is equivalent to the group in which the autonomous determination is performed. For details, refer to the related description of the grouping manner in the key technical point (1). For example, the terminal may calculate the group in which the terminal is located according to the second calculation strategy in the key technical point (1) by using the formula n=(the data bit used to calculate the group information) mod K, which may be predefined by a standard protocol. It can also be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
S502、网络设备根据第二消息确定所述终端所在的组。S502. The network device determines, according to the second message, the group where the terminal is located.
本实施例中,网络设备可根据第二消息包括的用于计算分组信息的数据比特计算终端所在的组,具体可参照参见关键技术点(一)中分组方式的相关描述。举例说明,网络设备可根据关键技术点(一)中的第二种计算策略,通过公式n=(用于计算分组信息的数据比特)mod K来计算终端所在的组,K可以由标准协议预先定义,也可以由网络设备和终端约定。In this embodiment, the network device may calculate the group in which the terminal is located according to the data bits used to calculate the group information included in the second message. For details, refer to the related description in the grouping manner in the key technical point (1). For example, the network device may calculate the group in which the terminal is located according to the second calculation strategy in the key technical point (1) by using the formula n=(the data bit used to calculate the group information) mod K, which may be pre-defined by the standard protocol. The definition can also be agreed by the network device and the terminal.
这里,在多个终端向网络设备发送了第二消息的情况下,网络设备可获知多个终端分别所在的组。Here, in a case where a plurality of terminals send a second message to the network device, the network device can learn the group in which the plurality of terminals are respectively located.
S503、网络设备向所述终端发送第一消息;第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。S503. The network device sends a first message to the terminal. The first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
网络设备可通过第一消息通知各个终端哪些组内有终端被寻呼。本实施例中,第一消息的实现可参照关键技术点(四)中第一种实现方式的相关描述,在此不赘述。The network device can notify each terminal which groups have terminals in the group through the first message. In this embodiment, the implementation of the first message may refer to the related description of the first implementation manner in the key technical point (4), and details are not described herein.
S504、所述终端根据第一消息判断所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼。S504. The terminal determines, according to the first message, whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
S505、若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。S505. If a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
S506、网络设备根据上行信号确定终端所在的波束。S506. The network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
S507、网络设备使用终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。S507. The network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
本实施例中,步骤S504-S507的实现和实施例二中步骤S203-S206的实现相同,可参照相关描述,在此不赘述。In this embodiment, the implementation of the steps S504-S507 is the same as the implementation of the steps S203-S206 in the second embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
通过实施例六所示的方法,终端自主确定用于计算分组信息的数据比特,实现方式更加灵活。本实施例中,被寻呼终端所在的组内的所有或部分终端向网络设备发送上行信号,网络设备能够获知发送范围能够覆盖多个终端(包括被寻呼终端)的波束,并使用该波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息。这里,网络设备扫描的波束数量和网络设备对应的总的波束数量相比,降低了很多。因此,本实施例可以减少网络设备发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。Through the method shown in Embodiment 6, the terminal autonomously determines the data bits used to calculate the packet information, and the implementation manner is more flexible. In this embodiment, all or part of the terminals in the group in which the paged terminal is located send an uplink signal to the network device, and the network device can learn that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam. Perform beam scanning and send a paging message. Here, the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
(七)实施例七(7) Example 7
本实施例对应于上述关键技术点(二)中截断标识和(三)中终端索引的场景。This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the truncation identifier in the above-mentioned key technical point (2) and the terminal index in (3).
本实施例中,各个终端自主确定自身的截断标识或索引,并通过第二消息上报给网络 设备。网络设备可向多个终端发送寻呼消息,寻呼消息中包括了至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识列表或至少一个被寻呼终端的索引。In this embodiment, each terminal independently determines its own truncation identifier or index, and reports the second message to the network device. The network device may send a paging message to the plurality of terminals, where the paging message includes a list of truncated identifiers of the at least one paged terminal or an index of the at least one paged terminal.
参见图7F,本实施例中的信号传输方法可包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 7F, the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
S601、终端向网络设备发送第二消息,第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引。S601. The terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or index of the terminal.
本实施例中,所述终端可以包括一个跟踪区内的多个终端,也可以包括网络设备管辖范围内的多个终端,还可以包括一个或多个PO对应的多个终端。并且,该多个终端中包括至少一个被寻呼终端。In this embodiment, the terminal may include multiple terminals in a tracking area, and may also include multiple terminals in the jurisdiction of the network device, and may also include multiple terminals corresponding to one or more POs. And, the plurality of terminals include at least one paged terminal.
终端可在进入一个TA区域或者开机时,即终端发起附着请求时,向MME注册的时候,向网络设备(例如MME)上报注册信息(终端标识,特定DRX周期等内容)时,第二信息和注册信息同时上报。这里,第二信息可仅发送一次,发送一次后,终端对应的截断标识或索引可能不再发生变化。When the terminal enters a TA area or is powered on, that is, when the terminal initiates an attach request, when the terminal registers with the MME, when the network device (for example, the MME) reports the registration information (terminal identifier, specific DRX cycle, etc.), the second information and Registration information is reported at the same time. Here, the second information may be sent only once, and after being sent once, the truncation identifier or index corresponding to the terminal may not change any more.
本实施例中,各个终端自主确定截断标识或索引。各个终端确定的截断标识的长度和位置都有可能不同,本申请不做限制。In this embodiment, each terminal autonomously determines a truncation identifier or index. The length and location of the truncated identifier determined by each terminal may be different, and the application does not limit the application.
S602、网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引。S602. The network device determines, according to the second message, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal.
S603、网络设备向所述终端发送寻呼消息;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或至少一个被寻呼终端的索引。S603. The network device sends a paging message to the terminal. The paging message includes a truncation identifier of at least one paged terminal or an index of at least one paged terminal.
本实施例中,寻呼消息的实现和实施例四中相同,可参照相关描述。In this embodiment, the implementation of the paging message is the same as that in the fourth embodiment, and reference may be made to the related description.
S604、终端根据寻呼消息判断终端的截断标识是否和至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,终端的索引是否和至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同。S604. The terminal determines, according to the paging message, whether the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or whether the index of the terminal is the same as the index of the at least one paging terminal.
S605、若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。S605. If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, the terminal is to the The network device sends an uplink signal.
可理解的,步骤S604-S605的实现和实施例四中步骤S303-S304的实现相同,可参照相关描述,在此不赘述。It is to be understood that the implementation of the steps S604-S605 is the same as the implementation of the steps S303-S304 in the fourth embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
通过实施例七所示的方法,终端自主确定截断标识或索引并上报给网络设备。在寻呼消息中通过截断标识或索引寻呼终端,和通过终端的完整标识寻呼终端相比,寻呼消息携带的内容更少,降低了发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。Through the method shown in Embodiment 7, the terminal autonomously determines the truncation identifier or index and reports it to the network device. In the paging message, the paging message is intercepted or indexed, and the paging message carries less content than the full identity paging terminal of the terminal, which reduces the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the paging message is sent.
(八)实施例八(8) Example 8
本实施例对应于上述关键技术点(二)中截断标识和(三)中终端索引的场景。This embodiment corresponds to the scene of the truncation identifier in the above-mentioned key technical point (2) and the terminal index in (3).
本实施例中,各个终端自主确定自身的截断标识或索引,并通过第二消息上报给网络设备。网络设备可向多个终端发送第一消息,该多个终端根据第一消息确定是否向网络设备发送上行信号。网络设备根据上行信号可获知被寻呼终端所在的波束,并利用被寻呼终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。In this embodiment, each terminal independently determines its own truncated identifier or index, and reports the second message to the network device. The network device may send a first message to the multiple terminals, and the multiple terminals determine, according to the first message, whether to send an uplink signal to the network device. The network device can learn the beam where the paged terminal is located according to the uplink signal, and send a paging message by using the beam where the paged terminal is located.
本实施例中,第一消息的实现方式为上述关键技术点(四)中第二种实现方式和第三种实现方式。In this embodiment, the implementation manner of the first message is the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the foregoing key technical point (4).
参见图7G,本实施例中的信号传输方法可包括以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 7G, the signal transmission method in this embodiment may include the following steps:
S701、终端向网络设备发送第二消息,第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引。S701. The terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or index of the terminal.
本实施例中,步骤S701和实施例七中步骤S601相同,可参照相关描述。In this embodiment, step S701 is the same as step S601 in the seventh embodiment, and reference may be made to the related description.
S702、网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引。S702. The network device determines, according to the second message, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal.
S703、网络设备向所述终端发送第一消息,第一消息包含至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引。S703. The network device sends a first message to the terminal, where the first message includes a truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal.
本实施例中,这里,在多个终端向网络设备发送了第二消息的情况下,网络设备可获知多个终端分别的截断标识或索引。网络设备可通过第一消息通知各个终端至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引。本实施例中,第一消息的实现可参照关键技术点(四)中第二种实现方式和第三种实现方式的相关描述,在此不赘述。In this embodiment, where a plurality of terminals send a second message to the network device, the network device may obtain a truncated identifier or index of each of the multiple terminals. The network device may notify the truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal of each terminal by using the first message. In this embodiment, the implementation of the first message may refer to the related descriptions of the second implementation manner and the third implementation manner in the key technical point (4), and details are not described herein.
S704、所述终端根据第一消息判断所述终端的截断标识是否和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,所述终端的索引是否和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同。S704. The terminal determines, according to the first message, whether a truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as a truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or whether an index of the terminal is an index of the at least one paged terminal. the same.
S705、若终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向网络设备发送上行信号。S705. If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the terminal sends the uplink to the network device. signal.
S706、网络设备根据所述上行信号确定所述终端所在的波束。S706. The network device determines, according to the uplink signal, a beam where the terminal is located.
S707、网络设备使用所述终端所在的波束发送寻呼消息。S707. The network device sends a paging message by using a beam where the terminal is located.
可理解的,步骤S704-S707的实现和实施例五中步骤S403-S406相同,可参照相关描述,在此不赘述。It is to be understood that the implementation of the steps S704-S707 is the same as the steps S403-S406 in the fifth embodiment, and the related description is omitted, and details are not described herein.
通过实施例八所示的方法,终端自主确定截断标识或索引并上报给网络设备。本实施例中,截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识的全部或部分终端(包括被寻呼终端),或者,索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的相同的全部或部分终端(包括被寻呼终端),向网络设备发送上行信号。网络设备能够获知发送范围能够覆盖多个终端(包括被寻呼终端)的波束,并使用该波束进行波束扫描,发送寻呼消息。这里,网络设备扫描的波束数量和网络设备对应的总的波束数量相比,降低了很多。因此,本实施例可以减少网络设备发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。Through the method shown in Embodiment 8, the terminal autonomously determines the truncation identifier or index and reports it to the network device. In this embodiment, the truncated identifier and all or part of the terminal (including the paged terminal) of the truncated identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or the index and the same all or part of the at least one paged terminal The terminal (including the paged terminal) sends an uplink signal to the network device. The network device can know that the transmission range can cover the beams of multiple terminals (including the paged terminal), and use the beam to perform beam scanning and send a paging message. Here, the number of beams scanned by the network device is much lower than the total number of beams corresponding to the network device. Therefore, this embodiment can reduce the time-frequency resource overhead of beam scanning when the network device sends a paging message.
参见图8A-8D,图8A-8D示出了本申请提供无线通信系统、终端及网络设备。其中,终端可以为图1或图2实施例中的终端,网络设备可以为图1或图3实施例中的网络设备,无线通信系统可以是图1描述的无线通信系统。下面分别描述该无线通信系统的几种可能的实现方式。Referring to Figures 8A-8D, Figures 8A-8D illustrate the present application providing a wireless communication system, terminal, and network device. The terminal may be the terminal in the embodiment of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2, the network device may be the network device in the embodiment of FIG. 1 or FIG. 3, and the wireless communication system may be the wireless communication system described in FIG. Several possible implementations of the wireless communication system are described separately below.
第一种实现方式,参见图8A,无线通信系统700包括:终端710和网络设备720。In a first implementation manner, referring to FIG. 8A, the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 710 and a network device 720.
如图8A所示,终端710可包括:接收单元711,确定单元712,发送单元713。As shown in FIG. 8A, the terminal 710 may include: a receiving unit 711, a determining unit 712, and a transmitting unit 713.
接收单元711,用于接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;The receiving unit 711 is configured to receive first configuration information and a first message that are sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate the terminal Whether the group in which the group is located is paged;
确定单元712,用于根据所述第一配置信息确定所述终端所在的组;a determining unit 712, configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a group in which the terminal is located;
发送单元713,用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,向所述网络设备发送上行信号。The sending unit 713 is configured to send an uplink signal to the network device if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
如图8A所示,网络设备720可包括:接收单元721,发送单元722。As shown in FIG. 8A, the network device 720 may include a receiving unit 721 and a transmitting unit 722.
发送单元722,用于向终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;The sending unit 722 is configured to send the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine a group where the terminal is located, where the first message is used to indicate that the terminal is located Whether the group has a terminal being paged;
接收单元721,用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,接收所述终端发送的上行信号;The receiving unit 721 is configured to receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged;
发送单元722,还用于根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。The sending unit 722 is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
在可选实施例中,所述第一配置信息可包括以下至少一项:所述第一消息的数据比特数目、所述第一消息关联的组的数目、所述第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于 计算分组信息的数据比特数目、所述用于计算分组信息的数据比特在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。In an optional embodiment, the first configuration information may include at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a number of groups associated with the first message, and each of the first messages The number of data bits of the group, the number of data bits used to calculate the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the synchronization signal The number of blocks.
在可选实施例中,终端确定所述终端所在的组n为:
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000006
其中,UEID为所述终端的标识,K为所述第一消息关联的组的数目,N为常数,N通过所述寻呼时机的数量、所述非连续接收周期的长度或者所述同步信号块的数量中的至少一项确定。。
In an optional embodiment, the terminal determines that the group n where the terminal is located is:
Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-000006
The UEID is an identifier of the terminal, K is a number of groups associated with the first message, and N is a constant, and N passes the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the synchronization signal. At least one of the number of blocks is determined. .
在可选实施例中,第一配置信息通过以下至少一项配置:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体访问控制元素。In an optional embodiment, the first configuration information is configured by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control element.
第二种实现方式,参见图8B,无线通信系统700包括:终端720、网络设备730。In a second implementation manner, referring to FIG. 8B, the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 720, and a network device 730.
如图8B所示,终端720可包括:接收单元721,确定单元722,发送单元723,其中,As shown in FIG. 8B, the terminal 720 may include: a receiving unit 721, a determining unit 722, and a sending unit 723, where
接收单元721,用于接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;The receiving unit 721 is configured to receive first configuration information and a paging message sent by the network device, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes at least one paged terminal. Truncated identifier or index;
确定单元722,用于根据所述第一配置信息,确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;a determining unit 722, configured to determine, according to the first configuration information, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal;
发送单元723,用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,向所述网络设备发送上行信号。The sending unit 723 is configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, The network device sends an uplink signal.
如图8B所示,网络设备730可包括:接收单元731,发送单元732,其中,As shown in FIG. 8B, the network device 730 may include: a receiving unit 731, and a sending unit 732, where
发送单元732,用于向终端发送第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;The sending unit 732 is configured to send the first configuration information and the paging message to the terminal, where the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal, and the paging message includes a truncation of the at least one paged terminal. Identification or index;
接收单元731,用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,接收所述终端发送的上行信号。The receiving unit 731 is configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, the receiving station The uplink signal sent by the terminal.
在可选实施例中,当所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识时,所述第一配置信息包括以下至少一项:所述终端的截断标识的数据比特数目、所述终端的截断标识在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。In an optional embodiment, when the first configuration information is used to configure the truncated identifier of the terminal, the first configuration information includes at least one of: a data bit number of the truncated identifier of the terminal, the The truncation of the terminal identifies the location in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
在可选实施例中,所述第一配置信息通过以下至少一项配置:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体访问控制元素。In an optional embodiment, the first configuration information is configured by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control element.
第三种实现方式,参见图8C,无线通信系统700包括:终端740、网络设备750。In a third implementation manner, referring to FIG. 8C, the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 740 and a network device 750.
如图8C所示,终端740可包括:接收单元741,发送单元742,其中,As shown in FIG. 8C, the terminal 740 may include: a receiving unit 741, and a sending unit 742, where
发送单元742,用于向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;The sending unit 742 is configured to send, to the network device, a second message, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information.
接收单元741,用于接收所述网络设备发送的第一消息,所述第一消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组后发送的,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;The receiving unit 741 is configured to receive a first message sent by the network device, where the first message is sent by the network device after determining, according to the second message, the group that the terminal is located, where the first message is used by the network device. Instructing the group in which the terminal is located whether a terminal is paged;
发送单元742,还用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,向所述网络设备发送上行信 号。The sending unit 742 is further configured to send an uplink signal to the network device if a terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged.
如图8C所示,网络设备750可包括:接收单元751,确定单元752,发送单元753,其中,As shown in FIG. 8C, the network device 750 may include: a receiving unit 751, a determining unit 752, and a sending unit 753, where
接收单元751,用于接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;The receiving unit 751 is configured to receive a second message that is sent by the terminal, where the second message includes data bits that are used by the terminal to calculate packet information.
确定单元752,用于根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组;a determining unit 752, configured to determine, according to the second message, a group in which the terminal is located;
发送单元753,用于向所述终端发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;The sending unit 753 is configured to send, to the terminal, a first message, where the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged;
接收单元751,还用于若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,接收所述终端发送的上行信号;The receiving unit 751 is further configured to: if the terminal in which the terminal is located, the terminal is paged, and receive an uplink signal sent by the terminal;
发送单元753,还用于根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。The sending unit 753 is further configured to send a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
在可选实施例中,第二消息的发送时机为:所述终端在发起附着请求时。第二消息可通过以下至少一项发送:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。In an optional embodiment, the sending timing of the second message is: when the terminal initiates the attach request. The second message may be sent by at least one of system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
第四种实现方式,参见图8D,无线通信系统700包括:终端760、网络设备770。For a fourth implementation manner, referring to FIG. 8D, the wireless communication system 700 includes: a terminal 760 and a network device 770.
如图8D所示,终端760可包括:接收单元761,发送单元762,其中,As shown in FIG. 8D, the terminal 760 may include: a receiving unit 761, and a sending unit 762, where
发送单元762,用于向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;The sending unit 762 is configured to send, to the network device, a second message, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal;
接收单元761,用于接收所述网络设备发送的寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引后发送的,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;The receiving unit 761 is configured to receive a paging message sent by the network device, where the paging message is sent after the network device determines the truncation identifier or index of the terminal according to the second message, where the paging message is sent by the network device. The message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal;
发送单元762,还用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,向所述网络设备发送上行信号。The sending unit 762 is further configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paging terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paging terminal are the same, The network device sends an uplink signal.
如图8D所示,网络设备770可包括:接收单元771,确定单元772,发送单元773,其中,As shown in FIG. 8D, the network device 770 may include: a receiving unit 771, a determining unit 772, and a sending unit 773, where
接收单元771,用于接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;The receiving unit 771 is configured to receive a second message sent by the terminal, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal;
确定单元772,用于根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;a determining unit 772, configured to determine, according to the second message, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal;
发送单元773,用于向所述终端发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;a sending unit 773, configured to send a paging message to the terminal, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal;
接收单元771,还用于若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,收所述终端发送的上行信号。The receiving unit 771 is further configured to: if the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, The uplink signal sent by the terminal.
在可选实施例中,第二消息的发送时机为:所述终端在发起附着请求时。第二消息可通过以下至少一项发送:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。In an optional embodiment, the sending timing of the second message is: when the terminal initiates the attach request. The second message may be sent by at least one of system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
可以理解的,关于通信系统700的各个实现方式,其中的终端包括的各个功能单元的具体实现可参考前述各个实施例,这里不再赘述。关于网络设备包括的各个功能单元的具 体实现可参考前述各个实施例,这里不再赘述。For a specific implementation of the communication system 700, the specific implementation of each functional unit included in the terminal may refer to the foregoing various embodiments, and details are not described herein again. For specific implementations of the various functional units included in the network device, reference may be made to the foregoing various embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
综上,实施本申请提供的技术方案,网络设备能够根据实际情况动态配置第一消息的数据比特数目。此外,通过减少扫描的波束,或者,减少寻呼消息的内容,可以降低网络设备发送寻呼消息时波束扫描的时频资源开销。In summary, by implementing the technical solution provided by the application, the network device can dynamically configure the number of data bits of the first message according to actual conditions. In addition, by reducing the scanned beam or reducing the content of the paging message, the time-frequency resource overhead of the beam scanning when the network device sends the paging message can be reduced.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如基站或者终端设备,为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的方法或步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is mainly introduced from the perspective of interaction between the network elements. It can be understood that each network element, such as a base station or a terminal device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function in order to implement the above functions. Those skilled in the art will readily appreciate that the present application can be implemented in a combination of hardware or hardware and computer software in conjunction with the methods or steps of the various examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is implemented in hardware or computer software to drive hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对基站或者终端设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。The embodiment of the present application may divide a function module into a base station or a terminal device according to the foregoing method example. For example, each function module may be divided according to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of the module in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and the actual implementation may have another division manner. The following is an example of dividing each functional module by using corresponding functions.
参考图9,图9示出了本申请的一些实施例提供的终端200。如图9所示,终端200可包括:一个或多个终端处理器201、存储器202、通信接口203、接收器205、发射器206、耦合器207、天线208、用户接口202,以及输入输出模块(包括音频输入输出模块210、按键输入模块211以及显示器212等)。这些部件可通过总线204或者其他方式连接,图9以通过总线连接为例。其中:Referring to Figure 9, Figure 9 illustrates a terminal 200 provided by some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the terminal 200 may include: one or more terminal processors 201, a memory 202, a communication interface 203, a receiver 205, a transmitter 206, a coupler 207, an antenna 208, a user interface 202, and an input and output module. (including audio input and output module 210, key input module 211, display 212, etc.). These components can be connected by bus 204 or other means, and FIG. 9 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
通信接口203可用于终端200与其他通信设备,例如网络设备,进行通信。具体的,所述网络设备可以是图10所示的网络设备300。具体的,通信接口203可以是长期演进(LTE)(4G)通信接口,也可以是5G或者未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,终端200还可以配置有有线的通信接口203,例如局域接入网(Local Access Network,LAN)接口。 Communication interface 203 can be used by terminal 200 to communicate with other communication devices, such as network devices. Specifically, the network device may be the network device 300 shown in FIG. Specifically, the communication interface 203 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the terminal 200 may be configured with a wired communication interface 203, such as a Local Access Network (LAN) interface.
发射器206可用于对终端处理器201输出的信号进行发射处理,例如信号调制。接收器205可用于对天线208接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理,例如信号解调。在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器206和接收器205可看作一个无线调制解调器。在终端200中,发射器206和接收器205的数量均可以是一个或者多个。天线208可用于将传输线中的电磁能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器207用于将天线208接收到的移动通信信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器205。 Transmitter 206 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by terminal processor 201. Receiver 205 can be used to perform reception processing, such as signal demodulation, on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 208. In some embodiments of the present application, transmitter 206 and receiver 205 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the terminal 200, the number of the transmitter 206 and the receiver 205 may each be one or more. The antenna 208 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. The coupler 207 is configured to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 208 into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 205.
除了图9所示的发射器206和接收器205,终端200还可包括其他通信部件,例如GPS模块、蓝牙(Bluetooth)模块、无线高保真(Wireless Fidelity,Wi-Fi)模块等。不限于上述表述的无线通信信号,终端200还可以支持其他无线通信信号,例如卫星信号、短波信号等等。不限于无线通信,终端200还可以配置有有线网络接口(如LAN接口)来支持有线通信。In addition to the transmitter 206 and the receiver 205 shown in FIG. 9, the terminal 200 may further include other communication components such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth module, a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to the above-described wireless communication signals, the terminal 200 can also support other wireless communication signals such as satellite signals, short-wave signals, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, the terminal 200 may also be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
所述输入输出模块可用于实现终端200和用户/外部环境之间的交互,可主要包括音频输入输出模块210、按键输入模块211以及显示器212等。具体的,所述输入输出模块还可包括:摄像头、触摸屏以及传感器等等。其中,所述输入输出模块均通过用户接口209与终端 处理器201进行通信。The input and output module can be used to implement interaction between the terminal 200 and the user/external environment, and can mainly include an audio input and output module 210, a key input module 211, a display 212, and the like. Specifically, the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like. The input and output modules communicate with the terminal processor 201 through the user interface 209.
存储器202与终端处理器201耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体的,存储器202可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器202可以存储操作系统(下述简称系统),例如ANDROID,IOS,WINDOWS,或者LINUX等嵌入式操作系统。存储器202还可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。存储器202还可以存储接口程序,该用户接口程序可以通过图形化的操作界面将应用程序的内容形象逼真的显示出来,并通过菜单、对话框以及按键等输入控件接收用户对应用程序的控制操作。 Memory 202 is coupled to terminal processor 201 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. In particular, memory 202 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. The memory 202 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX. The memory 202 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices. The memory 202 can also store an interface program, which can realistically display the content of the application through a graphical operation interface, and receive user control operations on the application through input controls such as menus, dialog boxes, and buttons.
在本申请的一些实施例中,存储器202可用于存储本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的通信方法在终端200侧的实现程序。In some embodiments of the present application, the memory 202 can be used to store an implementation of the communication method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side.
终端处理器201可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体的,终端处理器201可用于调用存储于存储器212中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的方法在终端200侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。 Terminal processor 201 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal processor 201 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 212, such as the method provided by the method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 200 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
可以理解的,终端200可以是图1示出的无线通信系统100中的终端103,可实施为移动设备,移动台(mobile station),移动单元(mobile unit),无线单元,远程单元,用户代理,移动客户端等等。It can be understood that the terminal 200 can be the terminal 103 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, and a user agent. , mobile client and more.
终端处理器201通常是终端设备的控制中心,通常可以称为处理单元,用于控制终端设备执行上述图2、图3、图4、图5、图6、图7A-7G和图8A-8D中关于终端设备所执行的步骤。例如,接收器205可以执行图2中终端设备接收网络设备发送的DCI,终端处理器201可以执行图2中确定第二PDSCH时频资源块的实现方式。具体可参见上述终端设备相关部分的描述,不再赘述。The terminal processor 201 is generally a control center of a terminal device, and may be generally referred to as a processing unit for controlling the terminal device to perform the above-described FIG. 2, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, FIG. 7A-7G, and FIG. 8A-8D. The steps performed by the terminal device. For example, the receiver 205 can perform the DCI sent by the network device in the terminal device in FIG. 2, and the terminal processor 201 can perform the implementation of determining the second PDSCH time-frequency resource block in FIG. For details, refer to the description of related parts of the above terminal device, and details are not described herein.
需要说明的,图9所示的终端200仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,终端200还可以包括更多或更少的部件,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 9 is only one implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In an actual application, the terminal 200 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
参考图10,图10示出了本申请的一些实施例提供的网络设备300。如图10所示,网络设备300可包括:一个或多个网络设备处理器301、存储器302、通信接口303、发射器305、接收器306、耦合器307和天线308。这些部件可通过总线304或者其他式连接,图10以通过总线连接为例。其中:Referring to Figure 10, there is shown a network device 300 provided by some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, network device 300 can include one or more network device processors 301, memory 302, communication interface 303, transmitter 305, receiver 306, coupler 307, and antenna 308. These components can be connected by bus 304 or other means, and FIG. 10 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
通信接口303可用于网络设备300与其他通信设备,例如终端设备或其他网络设备,进行通信。具体的,所述终端设备可以是图9所示的终端200。具体的,通信接口303通信接口203可以是长期演进(LTE)(4G)通信接口,也可以是5G或者未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,网络设备300还可以配置有有线的通信接口303来支持有线通信,例如一个网络设备300与其他网络设备300之间的回程链接可以是有线通信连接。 Communication interface 303 can be used by network device 300 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices or other network devices. Specifically, the terminal device may be the terminal 200 shown in FIG. 9. Specifically, the communication interface 303 may be a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, or may be a 5G or a future communication interface of a new air interface. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the network device 300 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 303 to support wired communication. For example, the backhaul link between one network device 300 and other network devices 300 may be a wired communication connection.
发射器305可用于对网络设备处理器301输出的信号进行发射处理,例如信号调制。接收器306可用于对天线308接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理。例如信号解调。在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器305和接收器306可看作一个无线调制解调器。在网络设备300中,发射器305和接收器306的数量均可以是一个或者多个。天线308可用于将传输线中的电磁能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器307可用于将移动通信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器306。 Transmitter 305 can be used to perform transmission processing, such as signal modulation, on signals output by network device processor 301. Receiver 306 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 308. For example, signal demodulation. In some embodiments of the present application, transmitter 305 and receiver 306 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the network device 300, the number of the transmitter 305 and the receiver 306 may each be one or more. The antenna 308 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. Coupler 307 can be used to divide the mobile pass signal into multiple channels and distribute it to multiple receivers 306.
存储器302与网络设备处理器301耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体的,存储器302可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器302可以存储操作系统(下述简称系统),例如uCOS、VxWorks、RTLinux等嵌入式操作系统。存储器302还可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。 Memory 302 is coupled to network device processor 301 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. In particular, memory 302 may include high speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. The memory 302 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as uCOS, VxWorks, or RTLinux. The memory 302 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
网络设备处理器301可用于进行无线信道管理、实施呼叫和通信链路的建立和拆除,并为本控制区内的终端提供小区切换控制等。具体的,网络设备处理器301可包括:管理/通信模块(Administration Module/Communication Module,AM/CM)(用于话路交换和信息交换的中心)、基本模块(Basic Module,BM)(用于完成呼叫处理、信令处理、无线资源管理、无线链路的管理和电路维护功能)、码变换及子复用单元(Transcoder and SubMultiplexer,TCSM)(用于完成复用解复用及码变换功能)等等。The network device processor 301 can be used to perform wireless channel management, implement call and communication link establishment and teardown, and provide cell handover control and the like for terminals in the control area. Specifically, the network device processor 301 may include: an Administration Module/Communication Module (AM/CM) (a center for voice exchange and information exchange), and a Basic Module (BM) (for Complete call processing, signaling processing, radio resource management, radio link management and circuit maintenance functions), code conversion and sub-multiplexer (TCSM) (for multiplexing demultiplexing and code conversion functions) )and many more.
本申请实施例中,网络设备处理器301可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体的,网络设备处理器301可用于调用存储于存储器302中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的方法在网络设备300侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device processor 301 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the network device processor 301 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 302, such as the method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, on the network device 300 side, and execute the instructions contained in the program.
可以理解的,网络设备300可以是图1示出的无线通信系统100中的网络设备101,可实施为基站收发台,无线收发器,一个基本服务集(BSS),一个扩展服务集(ESS),NodeB,eNodeB,接入点或TRP等等。It can be understood that the network device 300 can be the network device 101 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a base transceiver station, a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (ESS). , NodeB, eNodeB, access point or TRP, etc.
网络设备处理器301通常是基站的控制中心,通常可以称为处理单元,用于控制基站执行上述图2、图3、图4、图5、图6、图7A-7G和图8A-8D中关于网络设备或基站所执行的步骤。例如,网络设备处理器301可以执行图2中网络设备配置DCI的步骤,发射器305可以执行图2中通过PDCCH发送DCI的实现方式的步骤。具体可参见上述网络设备相关部分的描述,不再赘述。The network device processor 301 is typically a control center of a base station, and may be generally referred to as a processing unit for controlling the base station to perform the above-described Figures 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 7A-7G, and 8A-8D. The steps performed by the network device or base station. For example, network device processor 301 can perform the steps of network device configuration DCI in FIG. 2, and transmitter 305 can perform the steps of implementing the DCI by PDCCH in FIG. For details, refer to the description of related parts of the above network device, and details are not described herein.
需要说明的,图10所示的网络设备300仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,网络设备300还可以包括更多或更少的部件,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the network device 300 shown in FIG. 10 is only one implementation of the embodiment of the present application. In actual applications, the network device 300 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、计算机软件或者二者的结合来实现,为了清楚地说明硬件和软件的可互换性,在上述说明中已经按照功能一般性地描述了各示例的组成及步骤。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, computer software, or a combination of both, for clarity of hardware and software. Interchangeability, the composition and steps of the various examples have been generally described in terms of function in the above description. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods for implementing the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present invention.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为了描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。A person skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另外,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口、装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,也可以是电的,机械的或其它的形式连接。In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, or an electrical, mechanical or other form of connection.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本发明实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the embodiments of the present invention.
另外,在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以是两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本发明的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分,或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present invention contributes in essence or to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium. A number of instructions are included to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本发明的具体实施方式,但本发明的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到各种等效的修改或替换,这些修改或替换都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。因此,本发明的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only the specific embodiment of the present invention, but the scope of the present invention is not limited thereto, and any equivalent person can be easily conceived within the technical scope of the present invention by any person skilled in the art. Modifications or substitutions are intended to be included within the scope of the invention. Therefore, the scope of protection of the present invention should be determined by the scope of the claims.

Claims (46)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    接收网络设备发送的下行控制信息DCI,所述DCI中包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH时频资源块的信息,所述DCI调度N个PDSCH时频资源块,每个PDSCH时频资源块提供至少一个终端设备的寻呼信息,所述N为大于等于1的正整数;Receiving downlink control information DCI sent by the network device, where the DCI includes information of a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the DCI schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides at least one terminal Paging information of the device, where N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
    根据所述DCI确定需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块,所述需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块是所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的至少部分时频资源块;Determining, according to the DCI, a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated, where the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated is at least part of the N-th PDSCH time-frequency resource block;
    解调所述需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块。Demodulating the PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N的取值通过下述方式中的一种获取:The method according to claim 1, wherein the value of the N is obtained by one of the following methods:
    接收所述网络设备通过DCI指示的所述N的取值;Receiving, by the network device, a value of the N indicated by the DCI;
    接收所述网络设备通过网络配置信息指示的所述N的取值;或,Receiving, by the network device, the value of the N indicated by the network configuration information; or
    根据预先配置的N的取值作为所述N的取值。The value of N is used as the value of the N according to the value of the pre-configured N.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于:Method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that it comprises:
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的时频资源大小相同;和/或Each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks has the same time-frequency resource size of each of the PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; and/or
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略MCS相同。The modulation and coding strategy MCS of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is the same.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3所述的任一方法,其特征在于:A method according to any of claims 1-3, characterized in that:
    所述根据所述DCI确定需要解调的PDSCH时频资源块包括:Determining, according to the DCI, a PDSCH time-frequency resource block that needs to be demodulated includes:
    根据自身标识的全部或部分数据比特对N取余,获取与自身标识对应的PDSCH时频资源块的编号或位置;或,Obtaining a total of N or all of the data bits of the self-identification, and obtaining the number or location of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the identity of the PDSCH; or
    根据预先配置的分组,确定自身标识所在的分组对应的PDSCH时频资源块。The PDSCH time-frequency resource block corresponding to the packet in which the identity is located is determined according to the pre-configured packet.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4所述的任一方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of any of claims 1-4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块,是通过预先配置或所述网络设备指示的方式限制物理资源块PRB的数目或带宽大小后的PDSCH时频资源块。The N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks after the number of physical resource blocks PRB or the bandwidth size is limited by a pre-configuration or a manner indicated by the network device.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5所述的任一方法,其特征在于:A method according to any of claims 1-5, characterized in that:
    所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,The information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
    所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。The information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:The method according to claim 6, wherein when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块分组后的信息;或,The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates information after the N pieces of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are grouped; or
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的大小。The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates the size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  8. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:The method according to claim 6, wherein when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
    通过一个物理下行控制信道PDCCH接收一个DCI,所述一个DCI中包括N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,Receiving, by using one physical downlink control channel PDCCH, a DCI, where the one DCI includes information of N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
    通过N个PDCCH接收N个DCI,所述N个DCI中每个DCI中包括一个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。The N DCIs are received by the N PDCCHs, and each of the N DCIs includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  9. 根据权利要求6或8所述的方法,其特征在于:Method according to claim 6 or 8, characterized in that:
    所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的分组索引信息、资源块大小和MCS;或,The DCI further includes packet index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier; or
    所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的寻呼接入时机PO索引信息、资源块大小和MCS。The DCI further includes paging access opportunity PO index information, resource block size, and MCS of the terminal device identifier.
  10. 根据权利要求1-9所述的任一方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of any of claims 1-9, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收所述网络设备发送的配置信息,所述配置信息包括Y组信息,每组信息包括寻呼的X个终端设备的信息或X个终端设备的标识;所述X和Y为大于等于1的正整数;Receiving configuration information sent by the network device, where the configuration information includes Y group information, where each group of information includes information of X terminal devices that are paged or identifiers of X terminal devices; and X and Y are greater than or equal to 1. Positive integer
    所述方法还包括:The method further includes:
    根据所述X和Y的值确定需要接收的PO。The PO that needs to be received is determined based on the values of X and Y.
  11. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    确定需要发送的下行控制信息DCI,所述DCI中包括物理下行共享信道PDSCH时频资源块的信息,所述DCI调度N个PDSCH时频资源块,每个PDSCH时频资源块提供至少一个终端设备的寻呼信息,所述N为大于等于1的正整数;Determining downlink control information DCI to be transmitted, where the DCI includes information of a physical downlink shared channel PDSCH time-frequency resource block, the DCI schedules N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks, and each PDSCH time-frequency resource block provides at least one terminal device Paging information, the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
    通过物理下行控制信道PDCCH发送所述DCI。The DCI is transmitted through a physical downlink control channel PDCCH.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 11 wherein the method further comprises:
    通过所述DCI指示所述N的取值;The value of the N is indicated by the DCI;
    通过网络配置信息指示所述N的取值;或,The value of the N is indicated by the network configuration information; or
    根据预先配置确定所述N的值。The value of the N is determined according to a pre-configuration.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于:A method according to claim 11 or 12, characterized in that:
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的时频资源大小相同;和/或Each of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks has the same time-frequency resource size of each of the PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; and/or
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中的每个PDSCH时频资源块的调制和编码策略MCS相同。The modulation and coding strategy MCS of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is the same.
  14. 根据权利要求11-13所述的任一方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of any of claims 11-13, wherein the method further comprises:
    通过预先配置或指示的方式,限制所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的物理资源块PRB的数目或带宽大小。The number of the physical resource blocks PRB or the bandwidth of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks is limited by a pre-configured or indicated manner.
  15. 根据权利要求13-14所述的任一方法,其特征在于:A method according to any of claims 13-14, characterized in that:
    所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,The information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
    所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。The information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:The method according to claim 15, wherein when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is the information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块分组后的信息;或,The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates information after the N pieces of PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks are grouped; or
    所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息指示所述N个PDSCH时频资源块的大小。The information of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks indicates the size of the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks.
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述PDSCH时频资源块的信息为所述N个PDSCH时频资源块中每个PDSCH时频资源块的信息时:The method according to claim 15, wherein when the information of the PDSCH time-frequency resource block is information of each PDSCH time-frequency resource block in the N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks:
    通过一个PDCCH接收一个DCI,所述一个DCI中包括N个PDSCH时频资源块的信息;或,Receiving, by using one PDCCH, one DCI, where the one DCI includes information of N PDSCH time-frequency resource blocks; or
    通过N个PDCCH接收N个DCI,所述N个DCI中每个DCI中包括一个PDSCH时频资源块的信息。The N DCIs are received by the N PDCCHs, and each of the N DCIs includes information of one PDSCH time-frequency resource block.
  18. 根据权利要求15或17所述的方法,其特征在于:A method according to claim 15 or 17, wherein:
    所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的分组索引信息、资源块大小和MCS;或,The DCI further includes packet index information, a resource block size, and an MCS of the terminal device identifier; or
    所述DCI中还包括终端设备标识的寻呼接入时机PO索引信息、资源块大小和MCS。The DCI further includes paging access opportunity PO index information, resource block size, and MCS of the terminal device identifier.
  19. 根据权利要求13-18所述的任一方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:A method according to any of claims 13-18, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送配置信息,Send configuration information,
    所述配置信息包括Y组信息,每组信息包括寻呼的X个终端设备或X个终端设备的标识;所述X和Y为大于等于1的正整数;The configuration information includes Y group information, and each group of information includes an identifier of X terminal devices or X terminal devices that are paging; the X and Y are positive integers greater than or equal to 1;
    所述方法还包括:The method further includes:
    根据所述X和Y的值确定需要接收的寻呼接入时机PO。A paging access opportunity PO that needs to be received is determined according to the values of X and Y.
  20. 一种通信方法,其特征在于:A communication method characterized by:
    向终端设备发送寻呼消息的配置信息;所述配置信息包括寻呼消息的一个控制资源块的时频位置信息,所述一个控制资源块由N个寻呼接入时机PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成;所述N为大于等于1的正整数;And sending, to the terminal device, configuration information of the paging message, where the configuration information includes time-frequency location information of a control resource block of the paging message, where the one control resource block is a paging message corresponding to the N paging access occasions PO The time-frequency resource composition of the control resource; the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
    基于所述配置信息向所述终端设备发送寻呼消息的控制资源。And transmitting, to the terminal device, a control resource of the paging message based on the configuration information.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 20 wherein:
    所述时频资源块被划分为K等份,所述K为大于等于1的正整数。The time-frequency resource block is divided into K equal parts, and the K is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1.
  22. 一种通信方法,其特征在于:A communication method characterized by:
    接收网络设备发送的寻呼消息的配置信息;所述配置信息包括寻呼消息的一个控制资源块的时频位置信息,所述一个控制资源块由N个寻呼接入时机PO对应的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源组成;所述N为大于等于1的正整数;Receiving configuration information of a paging message sent by the network device; the configuration information includes time-frequency location information of a control resource block of the paging message, and the paging bit corresponding to the N paging access occasions PO of the one control resource block The time-frequency resource composition of the control resource of the message; the N is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1;
    接收所述网络设备发送的寻呼消息的控制资源。Receiving a control resource of a paging message sent by the network device.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 22 wherein:
    所述终端设备根据所述配置信息的周期确定发送给所述终端设备的PO的寻呼消息的控制资源的时频资源位置。The terminal device determines a time-frequency resource location of a control resource of a paging message of a PO sent to the terminal device according to a period of the configuration information.
  24. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    终端接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;The terminal receives the first configuration information and the first message sent by the network device; the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine the group where the terminal is located, and the first message is used to indicate whether the group where the terminal is located has The terminal is paged;
    所述终端根据所述第一配置信息确定所述终端所在的组;Determining, by the terminal, the group in which the terminal is located according to the first configuration information;
    若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,则所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。If the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  25. 如权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 24 wherein
    所述第一配置信息包括以下至少一项:所述第一消息的数据比特数目、所述第一消息关联的组的数目、所述第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、所述用于计算分组信息的数据比特在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。The first configuration information includes at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a number of groups associated with the first message, a number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and is used for The number of data bits of the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端根据所述第一配置信息确定所述终端所在的组,具体包括:The method according to claim 25, wherein the determining, by the terminal, the group in which the terminal is located according to the first configuration information, specifically includes:
    所述终端确定所述终端所在的组n为:
    Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-100001
    The terminal determines that the group n where the terminal is located is:
    Figure PCTCN2018103376-appb-100001
    其中,UEID为所述终端的标识,K为所述第一消息关联的组的数目,N为常数,N通过所述寻呼时机的数量、所述非连续接收周期的长度或者所述同步信号块的数量中的 至少一项确定。The UEID is an identifier of the terminal, K is a number of groups associated with the first message, and N is a constant, and N passes the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the synchronization signal. At least one of the number of blocks is determined.
  27. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    终端接收网络设备发送的第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;The terminal receives the first configuration information and the paging message sent by the network device; the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal; and the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal. ;
    所述终端根据所述第一配置信息,确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;Determining, by the terminal, a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal according to the first configuration information;
    若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the terminal is to the network device Send an upstream signal.
  28. 如权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 27 wherein:
    当所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识时,When the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier of the terminal,
    所述第一配置信息包括以下至少一项:所述终端的截断标识的数据比特数目、所述终端的截断标识在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量;The first configuration information includes at least one of: a number of data bits of the truncated identifier of the terminal, a location of the truncated identifier of the terminal in the terminal identifier, a number of paging occasions, and a length of the discontinuous reception period. Or the number of sync signal blocks;
    其中,所述终端的截断标识为所述终端标识的部分数据比特。The truncation identifier of the terminal is a partial data bit of the terminal identifier.
  29. 如权利要求28所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 28 wherein:
    所述终端根据所述第一配置信息,确定所述终端的截断标识,具体包括:Determining, by the terminal, the truncated identifier of the terminal according to the first configuration information, specifically:
    所述终端根据所述寻呼时机的数量、所述非连续接收周期的长度或者所述同步信号块的数量中的至少一项,确定所述终端的截断标识在所述终端标识中的位置;Determining, by the terminal, a location of the truncated identifier of the terminal in the terminal identifier according to at least one of a number of paging occasions, a length of the discontinuous reception period, or a quantity of the synchronization signal block;
    其中,所述终端的截断标识的位置和所述终端标识的最低log 2N个数据比特相邻;N为常数,N通过所述寻呼时机的数量、所述非连续接收周期的长度或者所述同步信号块的数量中的至少一项确定。 Wherein the location of the truncated identifier of the terminal is adjacent to a lowest log 2 N data bits of the terminal identifier; N is a constant, N passes the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or At least one of the number of synchronization signal blocks is determined.
  30. 如权利要求27-29任一项所述的方法,其特征在于:A method according to any one of claims 27-29, wherein:
    所述第一配置信息通过以下至少一项配置:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。The first configuration information is configured by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
  31. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    终端向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;The terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information;
    所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的第一消息,所述第一消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组后发送的,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;Receiving, by the terminal, the first message sent by the network device, where the first message is sent by the network device according to the second message, and the first message is used to indicate the location Whether the terminal in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged;
    若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。If the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the terminal sends an uplink signal to the network device.
  32. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    终端向网络设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;The terminal sends a second message to the network device, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or index of the terminal;
    所述终端接收所述网络设备发送的寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息为所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引后发送的,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;The terminal receives a paging message sent by the network device, where the paging message is sent after the network device determines the truncation identifier or index of the terminal according to the second message, where the paging message includes at least a truncated identifier or index of a paged terminal;
    若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所 述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述终端向所述网络设备发送上行信号。If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the terminal is to the network device Send an upstream signal.
  33. 如权利要求32所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 32 wherein:
    所述终端在发起附着请求时,向所述网络设备发送第二消息。When the terminal initiates an attach request, the terminal sends a second message to the network device.
  34. 如权利要求32或33所述的方法,其特征在于:A method according to claim 32 or 33, wherein:
    所述终端通过以下至少一项发送所述第二消息:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。The terminal sends the second message by using at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
  35. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息和第一消息;所述第一配置信息用于所述终端确定所述终端所在的组,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号;The network device sends the first configuration information and the first message to the terminal; the first configuration information is used by the terminal to determine the group where the terminal is located, and the first message is used to indicate whether the group where the terminal is located has a terminal Being paged; if the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal being paged, the network device receives an uplink signal sent by the terminal;
    所述网络设备根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。The network device sends a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
  36. 如权利要求35所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 35, wherein
    所述第一配置信息包括以下至少一项:所述第一消息的数据比特数目、所述第一消息关联的组的数目、所述第一消息中指示每个组的数据比特数目、用于计算分组信息的数据比特数目、所述用于计算分组信息的数据比特在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量。The first configuration information includes at least one of: a number of data bits of the first message, a number of groups associated with the first message, a number of data bits indicating each group in the first message, and is used for The number of data bits of the packet information, the location of the data bits used to calculate the packet information in the terminal identification, the number of paging occasions, the length of the discontinuous reception period, or the number of synchronization signal blocks.
  37. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    网络设备向终端发送第一配置信息和寻呼消息;所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识或索引;所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;The network device sends the first configuration information and the paging message to the terminal; the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal; and the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of the at least one paged terminal;
    若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号。If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the network device receives the terminal The uplink signal sent.
  38. 如权利要求37所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 37 wherein:
    当所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端的截断标识时,When the first configuration information is used to configure a truncation identifier of the terminal,
    所述第一配置信息包括以下至少一项:所述终端的截断标识的数据比特数目、所述终端的截断标识在所述终端标识中的位置、寻呼时机的数量、非连续接收周期的长度或者同步信号块的数量;The first configuration information includes at least one of: a number of data bits of the truncated identifier of the terminal, a location of the truncated identifier of the terminal in the terminal identifier, a number of paging occasions, and a length of the discontinuous reception period. Or the number of sync signal blocks;
    其中,所述终端的截断标识为所述终端标识的部分数据比特。The truncation identifier of the terminal is a partial data bit of the terminal identifier.
  39. 如权利要求37或38所述的方法,其特征在于:A method according to claim 37 or 38, wherein:
    所述第一配置信息通过以下至少一项配置:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体访问控制元素。The first configuration information is configured by at least one of system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control element.
  40. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    网络设备接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端对应的用于计算分组信息的数据比特;Receiving, by the network device, a second message sent by the terminal, where the second message includes data bits corresponding to the terminal for calculating packet information;
    所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端所在的组;Determining, by the network device, the group in which the terminal is located according to the second message;
    所述网络设备向所述终端发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端所在的组是否有终端被寻呼;The network device sends a first message to the terminal, where the first message is used to indicate whether a group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged;
    若所述终端所在的组有终端被寻呼,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号;If the group in which the terminal is located has a terminal that is paged, the network device receives an uplink signal sent by the terminal;
    所述网络设备根据所述上行信号向所述终端发送寻呼消息。The network device sends a paging message to the terminal according to the uplink signal.
  41. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    网络设备接收终端发送的第二消息,所述第二消息包括所述终端的截断标识或索引;Receiving, by the network device, a second message sent by the terminal, where the second message includes a truncated identifier or an index of the terminal;
    所述网络设备根据所述第二消息确定所述终端的截断标识或索引;Determining, by the network device, a truncation identifier or an index of the terminal according to the second message;
    所述网络设备向所述终端发送寻呼消息,所述寻呼消息包括至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识或索引;The network device sends a paging message to the terminal, where the paging message includes a truncated identifier or index of at least one paged terminal;
    若所述终端的截断标识和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的截断标识相同,或者,若所述终端的索引和所述至少一个被寻呼终端的索引相同,所述网络设备接收所述终端发送的上行信号。If the truncation identifier of the terminal is the same as the truncation identifier of the at least one paged terminal, or if the index of the terminal and the index of the at least one paged terminal are the same, the network device receives the terminal The uplink signal sent.
  42. 如权利要求41所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 41 wherein:
    所述网络设备在所述终端发起附着请求时,接收所述终端发送的第二消息。The network device receives a second message sent by the terminal when the terminal initiates an attach request.
  43. 如权利要求41或42所述的方法,其特征在于:The method of claim 41 or 42, wherein:
    所述网络设备通过以下至少一项接收所述第二消息:系统信息、系统信息块、剩余最小系统信息、其他系统信息、下行控制信息、无线资源控制信息或者媒体接入控制层控制元素。The network device receives the second message by at least one of: system information, system information block, remaining minimum system information, other system information, downlink control information, radio resource control information, or media access control layer control element.
  44. 一种通信设备,包括存储器,处理器以及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的计算机程序,其特征在于:A communication device includes a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored on the memory and operable on the processor, wherein:
    所述处理器执行所述程序时使得所述通信设备实现如权利要求1-43任一项所述的步骤。The processor, when executing the program, causes the communication device to perform the steps of any of claims 1-43.
  45. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-43任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium for storing a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method of any one of claims 1-43.
  46. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-43任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, wherein the computer program product, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method of any of claims 1-43.
PCT/CN2018/103376 2017-09-08 2018-08-31 Communication method and communication device WO2019047770A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710807518.XA CN109474998A (en) 2017-09-08 2017-09-08 Communication means and communication equipment
CN201710807518.X 2017-09-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019047770A1 true WO2019047770A1 (en) 2019-03-14

Family

ID=65633571

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2018/103376 WO2019047770A1 (en) 2017-09-08 2018-08-31 Communication method and communication device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN109474998A (en)
WO (1) WO2019047770A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115053543A (en) * 2020-02-18 2022-09-13 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, communication apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium
RU2792878C1 (en) * 2019-05-13 2023-03-28 Нтт Докомо, Инк. User terminal and radio communication method

Families Citing this family (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11382151B2 (en) * 2019-06-18 2022-07-05 Qualcomm Incorporated Truncated identification indicators
CN113545144B (en) * 2019-08-08 2023-08-29 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Transmission and receiving method and device for enhanced physical downlink control channel
CN112469051B (en) * 2019-09-09 2022-06-14 上海华为技术有限公司 Method for adjusting running state and communication equipment
CN112713973B (en) * 2019-10-24 2022-11-01 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and device used in node of wireless communication
CN114631374A (en) * 2019-12-31 2022-06-14 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and device
US20230180180A1 (en) * 2020-04-29 2023-06-08 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Paging processing methods, base station and user equipment
WO2022016418A1 (en) * 2020-07-22 2022-01-27 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Paging method, terminal device and network device
CN115696576A (en) * 2021-07-31 2023-02-03 华为技术有限公司 Method and apparatus for paging
CN116017418A (en) * 2021-10-21 2023-04-25 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication device
CN117460027A (en) * 2022-07-13 2024-01-26 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101064903A (en) * 2006-04-25 2007-10-31 华为技术有限公司 Communication system resource distribution indicated method, base station and user equipment
CN102387598A (en) * 2011-10-19 2012-03-21 新邮通信设备有限公司 Method for scheduling physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)
US20150181464A1 (en) * 2013-12-19 2015-06-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for receiving or transmitting interference information

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2369890A1 (en) * 2010-03-26 2011-09-28 Panasonic Corporation Connection peak avoidance for machine-type-communication (MTC) devices
CN104885513A (en) * 2013-01-21 2015-09-02 富士通株式会社 Information transmission method, detection method and device thereof
WO2015042780A1 (en) * 2013-09-24 2015-04-02 华为技术有限公司 Method for receiving and method and apparatus for sending paging message
WO2015051547A1 (en) * 2013-10-12 2015-04-16 华为技术有限公司 Paging method and apparatus
CN105898867A (en) * 2014-08-28 2016-08-24 阿尔卡特朗讯 Paging method and device for coverage range enhanced MTC UE
US9769788B2 (en) * 2014-10-06 2017-09-19 Intel IP Corporation Coverage constrained devices and paging method
CN105992342B (en) * 2015-02-05 2019-07-12 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 Method in the communication system based on machine-type communication for receiving paging message
CN106455095B (en) * 2015-08-13 2019-09-17 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of data transmission method and device
EP3389329B1 (en) * 2015-12-31 2020-09-02 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. User equipment and base station

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101064903A (en) * 2006-04-25 2007-10-31 华为技术有限公司 Communication system resource distribution indicated method, base station and user equipment
CN102387598A (en) * 2011-10-19 2012-03-21 新邮通信设备有限公司 Method for scheduling physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)
US20150181464A1 (en) * 2013-12-19 2015-06-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for receiving or transmitting interference information

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
RU2792878C1 (en) * 2019-05-13 2023-03-28 Нтт Докомо, Инк. User terminal and radio communication method
CN115053543A (en) * 2020-02-18 2022-09-13 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, communication apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium
CN115053543B (en) * 2020-02-18 2023-11-10 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, communication device, and computer-readable storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN109474998A (en) 2019-03-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019047770A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
CN110621068B (en) Paging method and device
CN109076493B (en) System and method for paging in next generation wireless communication system
US11825473B2 (en) Common search space (CSS) for paging of NB-IoT devices
CN107258105B (en) Running paging mechanism to implement enhanced coverage mode
US20160302251A1 (en) Signaling for proximity services and d2d discovery in an lte network
WO2019080817A1 (en) Signal configuration method and related device
EP3209039A1 (en) Signaling for proximity services and d2d discovery in an lte network
JP2023002747A (en) Design of Paging Occasion in New Radio
KR20190113671A (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving system information
JP2018507659A (en) Wireless interface technology, apparatus, and method for using communication system
WO2014197501A1 (en) Enhanced node b and methods for providing system information updates to user equipment with extended paging cycles
CN109417796B (en) Method and apparatus for allocating resources in a wireless communication system
KR20180018350A (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving downlink control information in a wireless communication system
JP2019534644A (en) Cell identification information
EP3209050B1 (en) Method for transmitting physical downlink control channel, base station device, and user equipment
EP3439389B1 (en) Method and base station for configuring non-anchor physical resource block, and method and user equipment for determining position of non-anchor physical resource block
US10681623B2 (en) Methods and apparatus for cell access via anchor carrier
WO2019174453A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
CN112567831A (en) Method and device for transmitting and receiving synchronization signals in a new radio vehicle-to-everything system
KR20190113299A (en) Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving paging message by using frequency division multiplexing in next generation mobile communication system
US10980002B2 (en) Explicit configuration of paging and control channel in system information
US20230292391A1 (en) Communication system and communication terminal
US20170223661A1 (en) Paging method and device
WO2018127150A1 (en) Multi-sectorized antenna and communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18854808

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18854808

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1